JP2018011696A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce a load in a control.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: an information display device (batch display device 50) for displaying information related to a game by a luminary; information display device control means (game control device 100) for controlling the information display device; and a blink display timer (game control device 100) for controlling a blackout period and a lighting period in a blink state of the luminary. In the blink state, if a value of the blink display timer is in a prescribed blackout range, the luminary is turned off, and in a range other than the prescribed blackout range, the luminary is turned on. Regardless of whether or not the luminary is in the blink state, the blink display timer is always updated, and when the blink state is started, a state is started from a light emission state according to the value of the blink display timer at start time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 87

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine includes a control device for performing various processes relating to the game. This control device also controls the display device for notifying the player of various information related to the game, in addition to the execution of the game and the setting of effects (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-268167 A

  In order to advance the game, it is necessary to notify the player of various information related to the game, and the process for performing this notification is important. However, in recent years, in order to improve the interest of games, the contents of games and effects have become complicated and the burden of control has increased.

  An object of the present invention is to reduce the burden of control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
An information display device for displaying information about the game by means of a light emitter;
An information display device control means for controlling the information display device,
The information display device control means includes:
It is configured to display information about the game by controlling the light emitter in any one of a light-off state and a light-on state, or both of a blinking state,
A blinking display timer for controlling the period of turning off and the period of lighting in the blinking state,
When the blinking state is set, the value of the blinking display timer is controlled to be turned off if it is a predetermined turn-off range, and to be turned on if it is outside the predetermined turn-off range,
Regardless of whether or not the blinking state, the blinking display timer is constantly updated,
When the blinking state is started, the light emission state is started according to the value of the blinking display timer at the start.

  According to the present invention, the control of the information display device is simplified, and the control burden can be reduced.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart explaining a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure display process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 in a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining a process shift setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process for small hitting fanfare, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process for setting transition for small hitting process. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a usual figure normal process. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a normal process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining a process change setting process during a common figure change. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the process during normal map change, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the process transition setting process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart explaining a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart explaining a general electric operation transfer setting process. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the ordinary electric power remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart for explaining a process for setting a transition process for end of ordinary figure. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the normal chart end process, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the usual chart normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a figure explaining the content of the display mode on a hold display, and a hold display table. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a display during a change. It is a figure explaining the modification of the display during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of the display during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of a batch display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the display during special figure 1 change, and the display during normal figure change. It is a figure explaining the modification of the display during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of a batch display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a figure explaining the specific production information storage area. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the first half notice setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 hold information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 hold information setting process. It is a figure explaining the decoration display in case a starting memory | storage number increases. It is a figure explaining the decoration display in case a starting memory | storage number decreases. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of a specific production. It is a figure explaining the content of the specific production information storage area. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of a specific production. It is a figure explaining the content of the specific production information storage area. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode of a board production device. It is a figure explaining an example of the operation mode of a board production device. It is a flowchart explaining a movable body control processing process. It is a flowchart explaining a standby setting process. It is a figure explaining the structure and display mode of a sub information display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a sub information display apparatus control process. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED edit process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the display delay process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the starting memory | storage number in the 1st modification, and the change of a display. It is a figure explaining the change of the starting memory | storage number in the 1st modification, and the change of a display. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 hold information setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 hold information setting process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the update of the decoration special figure starting memory display in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the starting memory number in the 3rd modification, and the change of a display. It is a figure explaining the change of the starting memory number in the 3rd modification, and the change of a display. It is a figure explaining the change of the starting memory number in the 3rd modification, and the change of a display. It is a figure explaining the specific production information storage area in the 4th modification.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 that forms a movable effect device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game by a movable effect member that operates. As the board production device 44, a first board production device 44 a is provided below the center case 40. The first board effect device 44a includes a hexagonal columnar movable effect member, can be operated upward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2, and can be operated in a range indicated by a broken line. Further, a second board effect device 44 b is provided on the left and right sides of the center case 40 as the board effect device 44. The second board effect device 44b includes a plate-like movable effect member, can operate from the initial position shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41, and can operate within a range indicated by a broken line. In addition, a third board effect device 44 c is provided on the upper portion of the center case 40 as the board effect device 44. The third board effect device 44c includes a circular movable effect member, can operate downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2, and can operate within a range indicated by a dotted line.

  Here, the 1st board production | presentation apparatus 44a and the 3rd board production | presentation apparatus 44c have a part of operation | movement range which overlaps in the vicinity of the center part of a display apparatus, and mutually interfere, There exists a possibility that it may collide if it operates simultaneously. . Further, the second board effect device 44 b does not collide with the other board effect devices 44 because the operation range does not overlap with the other board effect devices 44, so that the second board effect device 44 b does not collide even when operated simultaneously with the other board effect devices 44.

  Further, in the lower left portion of the center case 40, a fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed separately from the decoration special figure fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41, and a sub memory for displaying the start memory number are displayed. An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub-information display device 90 is a first light-emitting unit that is a single light-emitting unit that forms a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special-figure variable display game corresponding to the first special-figure variable display game. A second sub composed of a single light-emitting unit constituting a sub-game display unit 91 and a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special-figure variable display game corresponding to the second special-figure variable display game. A game display unit 92. In addition, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories that is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game by two light emitting units. And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories that are the right to perform.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in a variable display and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking, and turned on. Can be displayed. In addition, the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 indicate the numbers of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memory (special figure 2 hold), respectively, to turn off the two light emitting parts, It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

  By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth symbol on the display device 41, and the display area is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the first board effect device 44a, the second board effect device 44b, and the third board effect device 44c, and the sub information display device 90 is in the process of operating these. Is not covered.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate, inflow area) 34 for giving a start condition of the normal figure change display game. The game ball that has won the normal start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

  Also, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area, inflow area) for providing a start condition for the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4).

Also, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area, inflow area) that provides a start condition for the second special figure variation display game is provided immediately below the starting winning opening 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the general variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4). The normal variation winning device 37 may be awarded even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the prize may be awarded rather than the open state.
Also, below the normal variation winning device 37, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

Further, in the game area 32, below the center case 40 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side, and depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The state is converted from a closed state (closed state unfavorable for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a driving device. During the state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big prize opening by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, and to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player It has become. Note that a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the large winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening. . In the gaming machine of this embodiment, two big prize opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big prize opening is detected by any of the big prize opening switches 38a. In this way, by providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the collective display device 50 has a configuration in which a plurality of light emitting units including LEDs as light emitting sources are arranged in a matrix, and each light emitting unit can independently set a lighting mode. Further, the player can visually recognize the lighting mode of each light emitting unit. In addition, in the figure explaining the collective display device 50, the symbols D1 to D32 displayed on each light emitting unit and the broken line surrounding the light emitting unit are displayed for explanation, and are not displayed on the actual collective display device 50. . Further, the light emission source is not limited to the LED but may be a lamp. Further, each light emitting unit may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, or the like.

  The collective display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display 51 (D1 to D8) for displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game, and a special figure 2 display 52 (D17 to D26) for displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game. ), A universal map display 53 (D27 to D30) for displaying the universal map display game is provided. Also, a special figure 1 hold display 54 (D9, D10) indicating the number of first start memories which is the right to execute the first special figure fluctuation display game, and the second right to execute the second special figure fluctuation display game. 2 Special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (D11, D12) indicating the number of start memories, and General figure hold indicator 56 (D31, D32) indicating the number of general figure start memories, which is the right to execute the usual variable display game Is provided.

  Further, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57 (D13) for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. ), A second game state display unit (second game state indicator, time-short state notification unit) 58 (D14) that lights up when the short-time state occurs to notify the occurrence of the short-time state, the number of rounds at the big hit (special variable winning device) Round display section 60 (D15, D16) for displaying the number of times of opening and closing 38). The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) that displays that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on at a position where the player can visually recognize the gaming board 30. Although a display device and a probability state display unit) are provided, they may be provided in the collective display device 50.

  In the special figure 1 display 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the special figure 2 display 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game.

In the common map display 53, during the variation time of the common map variation display game, the display during the regular map variation in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. When the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result of the normal fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the display during normal map display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (general map, normal symbol) for displaying the general map display game.
Details of the special-figure 1 changing display on the special-figure 1 display 51, the special-figure 2 changing display on the special-figure 2 display 52, and the normal-fluctuating display on the general figure display 53 will be described in detail later.

  The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 displays the number of first start memories (first hold number), which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 displays the number of second start memories (second hold number), which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The general figure hold display device 56 displays the number of general figure start memories (the number of general figure holds), which is the right to execute the normal figure change display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notifying unit) 57 turns off the lamp in a gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to perform left-handed than right-handed (normally-timed). When a right-handed game is more advantageous to the player (right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

  The second game state display unit (short time state notifying unit) 58 turns off the lamp in the normal game state where the short time state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), and the short time state occurs. If the lamp is on (when the variable time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp.

  The round display unit 60 turns off all the light emitting units when not in the special gaming state, and turns on the lighting state corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special gaming state. In this embodiment, when the selected number of rounds is “4”, only D15 is turned on, and when the selected number of rounds is “16”, only D16 is turned on. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the round display part 60, etc. may be comprised with a 7 segment type display.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning apparatus 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. . Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening / closing data. In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the special prize opening solenoid 38b and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the sub information display device 90 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling the provided board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effecting), and a frame that forms a movable effect device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game by the movable effecting member that operates. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is changed to the payout control device 200 ( From the dispensing unit controlled by FIG. 4), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball thrown in passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure start memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four pieces). If it is less than (), the usual figure start memory number is added (+1), and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the normal figure start memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It has come to be.

  Then, when there is a general map start memory and the normal map variable display game can be started, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed, the normal map variable display game is hit and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the winning state is not the winning state, the winning judgment random number value stored in the first stored base map start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether or not the hitting of the base map variable display game is lost. Then, a process for starting the normal map change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  In addition, as a process for executing the normal variation display game, the game control device 100 determines in advance a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined variation time on the general diagram display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. After the usual map change display which is repeatedly displayed in the given order is performed, a process for displaying the usual figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is performed. It should be noted that the general map display 53 is constituted by the display device 41 and uses, for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. as the normal identification information. It may be configured.

  When the result of the universal figure change display game is a win, the lighting pattern which becomes one of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol which forms a special result mode corresponding to the type of the hit is displayed on the general indicator 53. In addition to the stop display, the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, the general display display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is a result of the shift.

  Also, the winning ball to the start winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control apparatus 100, the first start memory that makes the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). The second start memory that stores the start memory (special drawing start memory) based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winning at the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of start memories stored is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. Also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game can be started, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first special figure variation display game in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The jackpot determination random number value thus determined is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

  When the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 1 display 51 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 1 fluctuation display, the first special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed. When the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time on the special figure 2 display 52 (fluctuation display device). After performing the special figure 2 fluctuation display, the second special figure fluctuation display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is displayed.

  Further, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) are displayed on the display device 41 (variable display device) corresponding to the special figure variable display game. A process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game for variably displaying symbols and the like is performed. In addition, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emission mode of the light emitting unit corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest.

  Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. A lighting pattern is displayed and processing for generating a special gaming state or a small hit gaming state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

  In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, for example, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38 by the big prize opening solenoid 38b to play the game into the big prize opening. Control to enable inflow of spheres. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the big prize opening is achieved. A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. When the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power release time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the time-short state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be a second variation time shorter than the first variation time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display. However, each special figure variation display is not performed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure fluctuation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is to be executed (executed with priority). In the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not limited in particular, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. Further, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the game board 30 is saved. ON (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed preferentially. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation has not been completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number update process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the small bonus symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, “Round initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the normal variation display game, and “Hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal variation display game It is a random number that is the initial value. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.
Naturally, the small hit design random number does not exist in a model without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is a gaming machine in which a random symbol initial value does not exist.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) or the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, and error monitoring ( A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), The address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is a bit to be inverted in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is terminated.

Note that unused bit data and bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data. As a result, there is a possibility that the data has the same value. is there.
Further, the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but there is a possibility that the data has the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S144). After that, it waits for a delay time (for example, about 100 μsec) to elapse until the second reading (step S145).

  When the delay time elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state in the first and second readings is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step S152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process and compared with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not there has been a change, in such a case, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that correct determination cannot be performed. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step S163). S164). In the present embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, “door / frame open” data, “security signal” data) is output to the digit / external information output port. It outputs to 136 (step S166).
Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In this embodiment, for example, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the general figure display 53, the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55, and the general figure hold display are displayed. The device 56, the round display unit 60, and the second game state display unit 58 are dynamically lit.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information is synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, “big hit signal 1” data, “big hit signal 2” data, “big hit signal 3” data, “big hit signal” 4 ”,“ design determination frequency signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and firing permission output data are synthesized (step S170). The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of winning balls set for each winning opening (in this embodiment, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on winning in the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the 3 prize ball counter area, 10 prize ball counter area, and 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 1, respectively. The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the winning number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes respectively.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is updated. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189). If it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the award ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main prize ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy state). Is done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a payout command for each timer interruption, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out a prize ball. In the state, the payout command is transmitted. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) include, for example, during a payout operation, a ball lending operation, a shot ball outage error, an overflow error, a frame radio fraud occurrence, a payout ball detection switch (paid out The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormal state of a switch for monitoring a ball, an underpayment error, an excessive payout error, or the number of unpaid award balls = the number of game balls remaining ), Etc. (when not = 0).

  If the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas have been checked. Determination is made (step S197). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of this embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter areas → 10 prize ball counter areas → 14 prize ball counter areas.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout number command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the game balls to the winning areas (the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning port 35, the special variable winning device 38) provided in the gaming area 32 are provided. Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control apparatus) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means pays out a prize ball command based on a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control, which is output from the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, a prize ball command is immediately issued. Pay A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means continuously output over a predetermined period without being sent to the control means. It will be like that.

  The game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning opening 36, normal variation winning apparatus 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 38), and the game control means (game control apparatus 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can specify whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number, and a status signal can start payout control. And when there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal is displayed by the payout control means. Whether or not the payout control can be started is specified before specifying whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is comprehensively performed, and a prize ball command is given based on the winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, normal variable prize winning device 37, general prize winning mouth 35, special variable prize winning device 38). Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game, and payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means outputs the prize ball command when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. Prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area The gaming machine External information output means (game control device 100) that outputs to the section, the external information output means, whether the status signal output from the payout control means is whether the payout control means can start payout control The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even if a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and a prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) includes a predetermined winning area (start winning prize port 36, normal variation winning prize device 37, general winning prize port 35, special fluctuation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize winning device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, one prize ball command is issued as the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), And the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the game in the predetermined winning area Sphere winning And the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means can store a predetermined winning prize by performing an update corresponding to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls that are determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to the area, and to output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. Can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and updates the game ball when winning in the predetermined winning area, and accumulates the number of winning balls by the external information output means By performing the update in correspondence with the processing, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 15 shows random number update processing 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt processing. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. A random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit design random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). Thereafter, it is determined whether the normal hit random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  If the normal random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). Further, when the normal hit random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial value of the loaded normal random hit random number is loaded. The value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

  If the normal symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. If the normal symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the initial symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the loaded normal symbol random number is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 16 shows random number update process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (the reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which random number of a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, a CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for DRAM refresh or the like. In addition, a counter called “M1 counter” that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, but the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as an addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) Is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as an addition value ( Step S238), the process proceeds to step S239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), The process proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value (1 of the random area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S242). S243). If the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246). If the updated random number area is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.
In the case of this embodiment, on the effect random number update table, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, the type information of the random number area to be updated (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) The address of the update area is defined for the number of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks).

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the detection of the game ball in the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning a prize opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning prize monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the big winning prize opening switches 38a in the special winning prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the big winning prize opening is obtained. In spite of not being opened, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning opening monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of an illegal winning number area, an illegal winning error notification command, an illegal winning prize Number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination), address of winning prize switch table, information of notification timer update information (permit / update) are defined. The winning table of the winning mouth monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, a winning number counter area 2 for each switch, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches). The lower address information is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S305), and an illegal & winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing (step S307), and the number of winnings for which the winning number is updated. Counter update processing (step S308) is performed.

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like The state monitoring based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the shot ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. The

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame open detection switch 64 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is “2”, state monitoring based on the fraud signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “3”, state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is “0” (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not “0” (step S314; N), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and a gaming machine for judging a state such as whether an error has occurred or not. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like A state monitoring based on two signals is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is “1” to “3”.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing from step S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 milliseconds, the processing from step S315 to S317 is performed every 16 milliseconds.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize winning monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two large prize opening switches 38a of the special variable prize winning device 38 and the start opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning prize device 37. With regard to the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), since it is easy to perform fraud in which the open / close member is forcibly opened and a game ball is inserted and the prize ball is paid out, detection of the winning is performed. In addition to monitoring fraud.

  In this fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special game state in which the special variable prize device 38 is opened when the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is the large prize prize switch 38a, and the prize monitor switch for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is being executed based on the normal hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated illegal winning number is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored. It is determined whether or not there is (step S325).

In the present embodiment, the number of fraud occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning prize switch to be monitored for error, but the number of fraud occurrences defines a different number for each kind of winning prize switch. You can also.
The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; N), a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S326) and the initial value is stored in the target fraud winning notification timer area. (For example, 60000 milliseconds) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and a winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting a winning ball is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step S333). If the notification timer update is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is allowed to be updated (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 38a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 38 and to be up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 milliseconds). Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the start port 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335). If the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S336), and the fraudulent winning cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Preparation is made (step S337). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step S340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 19 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process described above. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, an input change). Determination is made (step S352).

  If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether an overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In this embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S362). In the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  When monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352). If all the switches have been monitored (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. With the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area, and winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 20 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, and S316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S373), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, a target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is not on (step S372; N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step S376), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, a target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is on (step S372; Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S379; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S379; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

  When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag thus set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S387), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 21 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on-determined monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S393). It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 milliseconds) is set (step S395). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interruptions.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (Step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process is terminated. If it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues for the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning prize switch monitoring process, a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball at the special winning prize switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. Processing during fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening and a big hit end process are performed. A big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process when the small hit occurs A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. .
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (actual accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second start opening (step A111; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no unauthorized power transmission (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning of the monitoring target start port among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning with the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the special drawing start port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the starting opening prize flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether the winning is for the first starting opening (start winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).
In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a win (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first start opening is won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S166). A167).

  After that, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether the special prize opening process is in progress (step A201). . When the special winning opening is being opened (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being opened (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step S201). A202).
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is in progress (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether the small hitting middle processing is being performed (step A203). ).
When the small hitting process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hitting process is not in progress (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A204; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring processing is terminated. If the small hit remaining sphere processing is in progress (step A204; Y), the processing proceeds to step A205.
Then, “0” is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207) and an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A268), when the value of the winning counter is “0” (step A214; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter is not “0” (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step A215).
If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. It is determined whether it is in the middle (step A216).
When the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A216; Y), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes exceeds an upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (step). A218).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or larger than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220), it is determined whether the small hitting is being processed (Step A221). When it is not under mid-hit processing (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated, and when under middle hit processing (step A221; Y), the big win mouth control pointer area is small hit. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the big prize opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 holding number is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.
In step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not “0” (step A306; N), a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is executed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check. If the special figure 2 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary process transition setting process 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure ordinary process and the special figure ordinary process transition setting process 1 (step A741) in the later-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A322), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (Step A323). Then, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 30, first, a special figure fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 31, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (step A353), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 33 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the jackpot determination process (steps A154, A355, and A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the jackpot flag 1 setting process, and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of sync. Then, “other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the above-described special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination process ends.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Also, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special figure 1 becomes a special big winning symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol), the transition destination production mode is determined to be certain probability variation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in certain probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit is determined. The small hit design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of this embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of the big hit symbol, the destination production mode becomes a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number region (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern region. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (start winning award port 36) (based on the first start memory), Based on the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (based on the second start memory), a game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as game execution means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control apparatus 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first-half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of place (step A474). If it is out of place (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed, and step A477 is executed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 41 shows the special-fluctuation-variable process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special-figure normal process. In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. Here, 52 ms) is set (step A516), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 42 shows a special-figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special-figure normal process. In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, “1” is set as the process number (step A521), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A522).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. Here, 104 ms) is set (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is terminated.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step A603) in the special figure changing process described above. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number “2” related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 1 (for example, special signal 1 changing signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (Step A613), and a signal related to the end of change in Special Figure 2 (for example, special design) (2 in-flight signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614), and the control timer is initially set in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game for output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 milliseconds) is saved (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ) As the information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705). (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM Is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the hit result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a ball (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a ball (the so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (Step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command is set. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[High probability change count update processing]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update process (steps A726 and A735) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (during a high probability state) (step A751). If the special figure is not in high probability (step A751; N), the high probability variation frequency update process is terminated. If the special figure has a high probability (step A751; Y), the high probability change count is updated by -1 (step A752), and it is determined whether the high probability change count is "0" (step A753). ).

If the high probability variation number is not “0” (step A753; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step A753; Y), the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to high-probability end (for example, two jackpot signals are turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area.
Next, signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation is Save the time shortening state signal OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. In addition, there is a state of “high probability & short time” and a state of “high probability & short time”, and even in the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and The normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is always OFF.

Next, the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A757), the ordinary low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step A758), and the special figure game mode flag area is designated. The low probability & short time flag is saved (step A759).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to turn it off, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the above special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining rotational speed of the effect has become “0” (step A773). If the effect remaining rotational speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the remaining rotation number of the effect becomes “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). Then, the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the remaining effect rotation speed in the RWM is acquired. Save to the area (step A677), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the state of the probability has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A782). An effect command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining speed is prepared (step A783), and an effect command setting process (step A784) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), and an effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787). If the new effect mode is not a left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. If it is the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), an effect command setting process (step A789) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode. Since the game control device 100 manages the production mode in this way, for example, control such as generation of a specific reach only in a specific production mode can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the special figure display process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A791) and processed in the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (step A792).

  Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), the number without time is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag region is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag region is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the high probability state display. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in a high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display mid-process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the small hitting fanfare process transition setting process 1, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as a process number (step A811), and the process number is designated as the special game process. Save in the number area (step A812).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is turned ON (large hit + small hit is output) )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and an illegal monitoring period non-period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step A11) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). Then, the production command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the large winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is acquired. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the large winning opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A907). A process for setting a transition to a process for opening a special prize opening (step A909) is performed, and the process during the fanfare / interval is terminated.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the long open big opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A908). Then, a process transition setting process (step A909) during the special winning opening is performed, and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, special prize opening information 4 (all are long open), (5) 16R, special prize opening is open Information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, large winning opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), (7) 16R, large winning opening information 7 (1-4R) Is long open, and 5-16R is short open).
Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process (step A909). In the process for setting the process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the process for opening a special prize opening (step A911), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A911). Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning mouth count area is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round number is compared by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired (step A1003). It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is greater than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1005). An interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is performed, and the big winning opening is being opened. The process ends.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), an interval command is prepared (step A1007), an effect command setting process (step A1010) is performed, a big prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1011) is executed, and the big prize opening opening process is completed. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the end of the special gaming state is completed. An ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the time of preparation (step A1009), performing an effect command setting process (step A1010), performing a winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011), The process during opening of the big prize opening ends.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1011) in the above-described large winning opening opening process. In the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball process (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variable prize winning device 38, off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 38b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the big prize opening remaining. The ball processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is acquired. Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105). If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Move on to processing. If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening information is a rank-down effect system value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect in which a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues is executed, and that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect. Specifically, as the big hit pattern, “16R, big prize opening information 2 (all open long)” and “16R, big prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open)” Is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation notification effect is executed at the fourth round. If the selected jackpot pattern is “16R, big prize opening release information 2 (all long opening)”, the round continuation notification effect is notified and the round winning prize opening is long open in the fifth and subsequent rounds. If it is opened and the selected jackpot pattern is “16R, big prize opening release information 3 (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open)”, the round non-continuation is notified in the round continuous notification effect, In the rounds after the 5th round, the big prize opening will be opened with a short opening.

When the big prize opening information is not a rank-down effect system value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. If the winning prize opening information is a rank-down effect type value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
When the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, an interval time (for example, 3.6 seconds) for rank-down effect is set (steps). A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. The number of special rounds is not limited to one, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) is performed to process the winning ball remaining ball process. Exit.

  On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101). A1111), setting the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the winning prize opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, a big hit end process transition setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 56 shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step A1121), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A1121). A1122).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare / interval The middle process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 57 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1114) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of wins to the prize-winning mouth is cleared (step A1134), and the information on the round-number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the short-time operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is the short-time operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction” and “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state), and therefore, as the probability information command, “high probability / short time / direction mode A”, “high probability / short time / direction mode B”. , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), and an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a short-time state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216). .
When the short time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process transition is performed. A setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above jackpot end process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, 2 signals of the big hit) are saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-shortening state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57), the number of the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 Exit.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1256), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state (short-time state) over a predetermined period after the special game state ends. Then, in the specific gaming state, the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled so as to make it easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state, and more than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. The variation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure fluctuation display game is configured to be shortened.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (step A15) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the small hit fanfare mid-process, a small hit mid-process transition setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit middle processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hitting process transition setting process (step A1301) in the small hitting fanfare medium process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), in the small hit / medium process transition setting process, first, “8” relating to the small hit / medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, on-data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the big winning mouth count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning mouth is cleared (step A1316), and the small hitting operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hitting middle control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit middle process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the middle hit process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the small hitting process, first, the value of the small hitting control pointer is loaded (step A1401). Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not equal to or smaller than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. The hit processing ends.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting action end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1405), and the loaded flag has a high special figure probability. It is determined whether it is a flag relating to (Step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether it is a small hit in the special figure high probability. In this case, it does not matter whether or not the time-short state is in effect.
If the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process is terminated. When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and an effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. A small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit medium process ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit motion transition setting process (step A1404) in the small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the small hitting action transition setting process, a branching process (step A1411) is performed in accordance with the control pointer (control pointer during small hitting).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2”, or “4” in step A1411, the wait time (for example, 1500 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1412). The off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.
If the control pointer is “1”, “3”, or “5” in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 milliseconds) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting action transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the 200 msec opening and the 1500 msec closing are alternately performed, and the small hitting control pointer is sequentially set at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. Updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hitting control pointer is updated to “0”. At the end of the first 1500 msec closure (ie, when switching from the first 1500 msec closure to the second 200 msec release), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1” and the second 200 msec release is released. The small hitting control pointer is updated to “2” at the end, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “3” at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the small hitting control at the end of the third 200 msec release. The pointer is updated to “4”, and the small hitting control pointer is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closure. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec release, the small hitting control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the elapse of the 1900 msec small hitting remaining ball time and the subsequent 100 msec small hitting ending time, the small hitting The state ends. Therefore, after the fourth 200 msec opening, it is closed for 2000 msec, so the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process (step A1409) in the small hit medium process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the small hit remaining ball process transition setting process, first, “9” related to the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step A1421), and the process number is set as the special figure game process number. Save in the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66A, in the small hit remaining sphere process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the small hit end process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is designated as the special figure game process. Save in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hitting ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information on the winning prize count area is cleared (step A1515), the information on the small hitting middle control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0 cleared) (step A1516), and the small hitting end process transition setting process is ended. .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the small hit end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure high probability ( Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), an effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining speed in the RAM is acquired. Save to the area (step A1606), acquire the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transferred, and save in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

When the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1610). An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and an effect command setting process (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and an effect command setting process (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616). If it is not a left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. In the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), the process of step A1619 is performed. Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure short time (short time state) (step A1620).
When the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure short time (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end process is terminated.
If the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special drawing time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621) In order to turn off the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622). Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing ends.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hit end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the special figure normal process transition setting process, first, “0” related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, one signal for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is OFF) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status serial transmission buffer status is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the effect serial transmission buffer status (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is terminated.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as “command setting process”.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 70 shows a symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the above-described special symbol game process, and a symbol variation control process (step B15) in the regular game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data of the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag relating to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the ordinary diagram) is changing (step A2101). . In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

When the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the flashing control timer to be controlled is updated by −1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the flashing control timer after update is “0” (step A2105), and the flashing control timer after update is “0”. If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the updated flashing control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control target is set. Is updated by +1 within the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag relating to the control target symbol is not changing (step A2102; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, in the fluctuation control table of the first special figure (first special figure fluctuation display game), a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer, and the second special figure (second special figure fluctuation display game) is defined. ) Is defined as a flashing control timer initial value corresponding to 104 ms, and a flash control timer initial value defined as a flashing control timer initial value is defined as a flashing control timer initial value. Has been. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is set to 0 (variable symbol number upper limit determination value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

  Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the first special diagram (first special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the change display of the first special figure change-display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the second special diagram (second special diagram variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated alternately between 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 during-change display that is repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special figure fluctuation display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. In addition, 4 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit determination value in the variation control table of the ordinary diagram (ordinary variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the display during normal map display repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the normal map change display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

  Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 71 shows the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the distribution process selects the latter half fluctuation selection table of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation group table, or the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2. For selecting the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483). Is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number). In the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If the first data of the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result is stored. The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the first data of the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table) is not an unsorted code (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired (step A2203).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random value prepared in steps A473, A478, and A484 (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3). Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter Process.

In other words, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then determined in the previous step A2205. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number) or first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) specified in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, or first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the latter half variation selection table, the latter half variation pattern (the latter half variation number), or the first half variation pattern (the first half variation number) is selected from among the (variation numbers).
If it is determined in step A2205 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2205; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 72 shows the 2-byte sorting process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach” is defined. In the variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. .

If the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307), 2 bytes The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the first data of the selection table (second-half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is acquired. (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random value prepared in step A473 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A2304), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than “0” (step A2305). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter Process.
That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new value. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half variation selection table defined in the selection table (the latter half variation group table).
If it is determined in step A2305 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step A2305; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A2307), and a 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 71 is basically the same as the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 72, but the size of the random number used for the distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. Therefore, the program instructions for calculation are different.

[Normal game processing]
Next, details of the usual game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the usual game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a and the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the usual game process timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the usual game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the usual game process timer has become “0” (step B4).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the ordinary game process number. A process of setting the usual game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the usual game process number (step B7).

In step B7, if the usual game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the usual figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the usual figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A usual-day process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “1” in step B7, a usual figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure display process is performed.

If the normal game processing number is “2” in step B7, if the result of the normal map change display game is a win, the setting of the open time of the normal power according to whether or not the time is short is set. Or, a process for displaying a normal diagram (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the process for normal maps is performed.
Also, if the usual game process number is “3” in step B7, the usual process for setting the information necessary to continue the usual process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process is performed. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the normal game process number is “4” in step B7, the general electric power remaining ball process (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing the normal game end process is performed.
If the usual game process number is “5” in step B7, the usual figure end process (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the usual figure process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15) ) To complete the usual game process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game is in the right-handed gaming state (for example, during big hit, during small hit, during special drawing time shortage (during normal power support)). (Step B102).
When the game state is a right-handed game (step B102; Y), the number of common chart holds is acquired, and it is determined whether the number of common chart holds is less than an upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105). If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of ordinary drawings held is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (eg, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of reserved common charts is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved general charts is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved general charts is calculated. (Step B107). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109), and gate switch monitoring processing is performed. Exit.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball at the normal start gate 34, and stores the predetermined number as an upper limit as start memory that becomes the right to execute the normal variable display game. The starting storage means is made.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the ordinary figure winning game is in a hit state, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in a hit state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, when it is normal (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value of the action end (for example, “4”) is saved in the control pointer area during the normal game (step B205), the normal game process timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the general power prize switch monitoring process is performed. finish. In other words, if there is a public power prize that exceeds the upper limit during the normal hit state, the normal hit state is terminated at that point.

  Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal map is not being reached (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. If it is determined that the ordinary power count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B204; N), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B8) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the usual-day routine process, first, it is determined whether the number of usual-pending holds is “0” (step B301). If the number of usual-pending holds is “0” (step B201; Y) ) Performs the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321), and ends the normal figure normal process. If the number of reserved symbols is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) ( In step B302), the winning random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability that the winning result is normal in the usual figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the probability of the usual figure set higher than the probability (that is, the ordinary figure low probability) is high, that is, whether the state is in the short time state (step B304).

When the usual figure is not in high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the usual figure low probability is set (step B305), and when the usual figure is in high probability (step B304). ; Y) sets a lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at a normal probability of high probability (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307). If the value of the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B307; N), the value of the hit random number is set to step B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the set lower limit determination value (step B308).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step B307; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), In the area, the slip information is saved (step B309), the slipping stop symbol number is set (step B310), the slipping symbol information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (step B311), and the stop symbol number is temporarily stopped. Save to the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312) and the hit loaded in step B302. A hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol number. Save in the area (step B315).

In the case of this embodiment, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure low probability is 0/251, the hit probability at the time of the normal figure high probability is 250/251, the upper limit determination value is “251”, and the low probability lower limit determination value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”.
Therefore, when the normal probability is low, the hit random numbers are all in the range of “0” to “250”.
Further, when the normal probability is high, the hit random number value is “1” to “250”, and the hit random number value is “0”.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step 315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the winning random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the number of held maps 1 by one. I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.
Then, the normal chart transition process transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated. In other words, the game execution means for the game control device 100 to execute the universal map change display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the normal chart start gate 34 (inflow region) (based on the general chart start memory). Make.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
FIG. 77 shows the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B321) in the above-described normal figure normal process, and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) in the below-described normal chart display process. . In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, “0” is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step B331). B332). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 78 shows the process transition setting process (step B320) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process. In the process for setting the process for changing the normal map, first, “1” is set as a process number for shifting to the process for changing the normal map (step B341), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (step B341). Step B342).
Thereafter, the normal time change time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the normal time change time is common between the normal figure low probability state and the normal figure high probability state) in the normal time game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and the normal map change display game changes A changing flag indicating that the change is in progress is saved in the usual change control flag area (step B345).
Then, the initial value of the flashing control timer (52 ms in this case), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area (step B346), and the normal map changing process transition setting process is performed. Exit.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process of changing the normal map (step B9) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the normal map changing process, a general map display process transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map display process (step B401) in the process for changing the normal map will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the normal map display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the general map display process (step B411). The number is saved in the usual game processing number area (step B412). After that, the normal figure display time (for example, 600 milliseconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal figure change display game on the normal figure display device, is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B413), (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the usual figure fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the ordinary figure fluctuation control flag area. (Step B415), and the normal display display process transition setting process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the processing for displaying a normal map, first, a hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal processing is loaded (step B501), and the RWM hit flag area is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the normal figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information (for example, “0”). ”,“ 2 ”, or“ 4 ”) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B505). Next, a public power open time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B506). After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B211) is performed, and the normal map display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
FIG. 81 shows a process for setting a transition to a normal map during the normal map display process described above (step B507). In this normal process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal process (step B511), and the process number is saved in the normal game process number area. (Step B512). Thereafter, a test signal output data includes a signal relating to the hit of the normal symbol display game (for example, a normal signal per normal symbol is ON) and a signal relating to the start of normal electric operation (eg, the normal electric accessory 1 active signal is ON). In the area (step B513), in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B514).

  Further, the information on the normal power count number area for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is stored. The information on the illegal prize amount area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the normal process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the process for hitting the usual figure (step B11) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, in the process for the normal map, first, the control pointer for the normal map is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded control pointer for the normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit value. Is determined (step B602).

If the value of the control pointer during the normal map is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal operation switching setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process during the normal map.
Also, if the value of the control pointer during normal map is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), the process shifts to normal operation without performing the process of updating the normal process control pointer area by 1 in step B603. A setting process (step B604) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
FIG. 83 shows the normal power operation transition setting process (step B604) in the above-described normal process. The general electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the general electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer (medium control pointer per normal figure). I am doing so. In this ordinary power operation transition setting process, first, a branching process corresponding to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B611).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is closed. Is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B612), and the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B613) to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c. End the process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power release time that is the open time is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B615). End the normal power operation setting process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is “4”, the process proceeds to step B616 to complete the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, so that the process number is “4”. Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the ordinary game processing number area (step B617), and the ordinary electric ball remaining time is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 200 msec is saved as the wait time in step B612, 1700 msec is set as the normal power release time in step B614, and 600 msec is saved as the general power remaining ball processing time in step B618. .
Further, when the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol displaying processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “500 milliseconds” is acquired as the open time of the public power. Therefore, after the elapse of the display time of 600 milliseconds, the ordinary power open time is “500 milliseconds”, so the ordinary power (ordinary variable winning device 37) is opened for 500 milliseconds, and thereafter the control pointer during normal drawing is “4”. Therefore, 600 msec of ordinary electric ball remaining time is set.
Also, if the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 2”, “2” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the public power. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and thereafter, the control pointer is “2” during the normal map, so the weight of 200 milliseconds The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to “3” during the normal map, so that the electric power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer is updated to “4” during the normal map for 600 msec. The ordinary power remaining ball processing time is set.
Also, if the normal symbol stop symbol is “winning symbol 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal symbol display processing shown in FIG. In Step B506, “1700 msec” is acquired as the open time of the public power. Therefore, after the display time of 600 milliseconds elapses, the power transmission release time is “1700 milliseconds”, so the power transmission is released for 1700 milliseconds, and then the control pointer is “0” during the normal time, so the weight of 200 milliseconds The time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “1” during the normal map, so that the ordinary power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “2” during the normal map for 200 msec. The waiting time is set, and then the normal control pointer is updated to “3” for the normal map, so that the public power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer for the normal map is updated to “4” for 600 msec. The ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing time is set.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, an end process shift setting process (step B701) is performed.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal symbol end process transition setting process (step B701) in the above-mentioned ordinary electric ball remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the universal figure end process transition setting process, first, a process number “5” related to the universal figure end process is set (step B711), and the process number is set to the normal figure game. Save in the process number area (step B712).

  Thereafter, the ordinary ending time (for example, 100 milliseconds) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal relating to the operation end of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, the ordinary electric accessory 1 in-operation signal is OFF). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the normal pointer control pointer area is cleared (step B716), and the normal drawing end process transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B13) in the above-described normal game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the normal figure end process, the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-described normal figure end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal variation display game (for example, the normal signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (during fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58 and the round display unit 60 are made.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blinking display timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and whether or not the output of the specific bit in the blinking display timer area is on (1). Is determined (step S502). The blinking display timer of the present embodiment is configured by updating +1 by timer interrupt processing performed every 4 ms using an 8-bit blinking display timer area. In this segment LED editing process, it is determined whether the output of bit 5 in the blinking display timer area is the on timing (1). Since the value of bit 5 is switched between 0 and 1 every 128 ms, it is possible to control turning off and lighting in units of 128 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control the turning off and lighting in units of shorter time or longer time with reference to other bits.

If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure hold number display table 1 is set out of the general figure hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure hold indicator is defined. (Step S503) If it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the general-purpose hold number display table 2 is set (Step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved general maps is acquired from the set number of reserved general map display table and saved in the segment area of the general map reserved display (step S505). In this embodiment, as long as the number of reserved drawings is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the reserved drawings display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506). If it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the number of the special figure 1 hold on which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Among the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold number display table 2 is set ( Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (step S509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510). If it is the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (step S511). When the output on timing is not reached (step S510; N), the special figure 2 hold number display table 2 is set (step S510). S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 hold number display table, and is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display (step S513).
Further, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display state in the second gaming state display unit 58 that lights up when the shortening state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the shortening state is set (step S516), and the gaming state display number is set. The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display unit 58 (step S517). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 58 made up of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal times and turned on during special drawing hours (during normal power support).
After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the first game state display unit 57 for notifying that the right-handed game state is more advantageous than the left-handed game is defined (step S518). Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 57 made up of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left-handed), and right-handed (in the case of this embodiment, during big hits, during small hits, and power support It is configured to light up.
That is, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and the universal figure hold indicator 56 constitute start memory display means for displaying the information of the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as start memory display control means for controlling display on the start memory display means.

  In FIG. 87 (a), the display mode in the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and the universal figure hold indicator 56 is shown. Each display unit is configured to display the number of holdings by two light emitting units, both of which are turned off when the number of holdings is 0, one of which is turned off and turned on when the holding number is 1, and both are turned on when the holding number is 2, In the hold number 3, one is lit and the other blinks, and in the hold number 4, both are blinked.

  Such a display mode is selected so that the table is alternately selected every 128 ms by selecting the hold number display tables 1 and 2 according to the value of bit 5 of the blinking display timer area as described above. This is realized by referring to the current number of holds in the table and setting the corresponding display mode. FIG. 87 (b) shows the contents of the hold number display tables 1 and 2. Note that, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display mode corresponding to the number of holds is the same in each display unit, and the contents of the hold number display table are also the same, and are shown here collectively. Here, the light emitting unit 1 corresponds to D9, D11, and D31, and the light emitting unit 2 corresponds to D10, D12, and D32.

  For example, when the number of holdings is 1, the light emitting unit 1 is turned off when the light is turned off in the holding display tables 1 and 2, and the light emitting unit 2 is turned on in both the holding display tables 1 and 2. It will be in the lighting state. When the number of holdings is 3, the light emitting unit 1 is turned on by selecting lighting in the holding display tables 1 and 2. With respect to the light emitting unit 2, lighting is selected in the hold display table 1 and light-off is selected in the hold display table 2, thereby turning on and off every 128 ms.

  In other words, when the blinking state is set, the blinking display timer is turned off if the value of the blinking display timer is within a predetermined turn-off range (here, bit 5 is 0), and outside the turn-off range (here, bit 5 is 1). If there is any, turn it on. Further, at least the display state of the special figure hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is in a blinking state in the display state, and here the blinking state is the common figure hold indicator 56 flashing state. The light extinction range in the state is also a common range.

  Furthermore, the blinking display timer is constantly updated, and even when the number of holds changes, the blinking display timer is not reset or another value is set. Therefore, when shifting to the blinking state, the light emission state is either turned on or off according to the value of the blinking display timer in the first segment LED editing process after the number of holds is changed. For example, the light emitting unit 1 in the case of changing from the hold number 3 to the hold number 4 changes from the lighting state to the blinking state, but the value of the blinking display timer at the time of the change is a value for selecting the hold display table 1 (bit 5 is set). If the value is 1), the lighting is continued. If the value for selecting the hold display table 2 (bit 5 is 0), the lighting is immediately turned off.

  By controlling the light emission mode in this way, the blinking timing is synchronized between the light emitting unit 1 and the light emitting unit 2, and the visibility and decorativeness of the display are improved. Furthermore, the timing of blinking in the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and the general figure hold indicator 56 is also synchronized, and the visibility and decoration of the display are further improved. Further, the blinking control of a plurality of light emitting units can be performed by one blinking display timer, and the control burden can be reduced. That is, the collective display device 50 constitutes an information display device that displays information related to the game with the light emitters, and the game control device 100 lights up with the information display device control means for controlling the information display device and the light-off period in the blinking state. A blinking display timer is used to control the period.

  Further, when the number of hold changes and shifts from the blinking state to the lighting state, the value of the blink display timer selects the hold display table 1 in the first segment LED editing process after the number of hold changes (bit If 5 is 1), the lighting is continued, and if the value for selecting the hold display table 2 (bit 5 is 0), the lighting is immediately changed from being turned off to lighting. That is, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emission state is different from the light emission state to be shifted, the light emission state is immediately changed. Here, there is no case of transition from the blinking state to the unlit state. However, when there is such a transition, if the current light emitting state is turned off as described above, the light emitting state is maintained and the current light emitting state is changed. If it is lit, it is immediately changed to off.

  Based on the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and the game results in a special result, the game machine that generates a state advantageous to the player emits light. An information display device (collective display device 50) for displaying information related to the game by the body, and information display device control means (game control device 100) for controlling the information display device, wherein the information display device control means is in an extinguished state. And / or a lighting state, and is configured to display information on the game by controlling the light emitter in any one of the flashing state, a period during which the light is turned off and a period during which the light is turned on When the flashing display timer (game control device 100) is controlled to control the flashing state and the flashing state is set, the flashing display timer is turned off if the value of the flashing display timer is within a predetermined turn-off range. It is configured to control to turn on if it is outside, and the flashing display timer is constantly updated regardless of whether it is flashing or not. That is, the light emission state corresponding to the value is started. Therefore, processing such as setting a timer value or resetting the timer value at the time of transition to the blinking state or transition from the blinking state becomes unnecessary, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, an inflow area (start winning prize port 36, a normal variable prize winning device 37, a normal start gate 34) that can detect the inflow of game balls, and a start memory that becomes a game execution right based on detection of game balls in the inflow area. Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, and game execution means (game control device 100) for executing a game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. The area includes a first inflow area and a second inflow area, and the start memory means stores the first start memory as the start memory based on the detection of the game ball in the first inflow area, and the second inflow The second start memory is stored as the start memory based on the detection of the game ball in the area, and the game executing means executes the first game based on the first start memory, and the second game based on the second start memory. Configured to run games Then, the information display device control means (game control device 100) displays the first start memory number on the first display unit of the information display device (collective display device 50), and displays the second start memory number as information. This is displayed on the second display unit of the display device, and the blinking state is controlled by using a common blinking display timer for the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, since a common blinking display timer can be used in a plurality of display units, the control burden can be reduced. Moreover, the blinking state can be synchronized with a plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and visibility are improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first inflow region and the second inflow region are two selected from the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the normal start gate 34. The first start memory and the second start memory are start memories corresponding to the two selected inflow areas, and are two of the first start memory, the second start memory, and the normal start memory. It is. The first game and the second game are games corresponding to the two selected inflow areas, and are a first special map variation display game, a second special map variation display game, and a general map variation display game. Two of them. The first display unit and the second display unit are display units corresponding to the two selected inflow areas, and are a special figure 1 hold indicator 54, a special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and a universal figure hold indicator. 2 of 56.

  In addition, the information display device control means (game control device 100) has a predetermined extinction range common to the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, the blinking state can be synchronized with the plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and visibility are improved.

  Further, when the flashing state ends, if the current light emission state and the light emission state to be shifted are different, the light emission state is immediately changed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately notify the player of the change in the state.

  Although the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, and the common figure hold display 56 use the common blink display timer to display the blinking state, other than that in the collective display device 50 The flashing state of the display (special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, general figure display 53, first game state display unit 57, second game state display unit 58, round display unit 60, etc.) In this case, the blinking state may be controlled by using a common blinking display timer, and the blinking states may be synchronized with each other.

  Moreover, by setting the contents of the hold display table of the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and the general figure hold indicator 56, various lighting modes of the respective hold indicators can be configured. , It is possible to make the lighting mode relevant between the holding indicators. For example, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 may be turned on and off in the blinking state. Since the blinking display timer is common, when both the indicators are blinking, they are turned on alternately, improving visibility and decorativeness.

  In addition, when the light emission state shifts to or from the blinking state, if the light emission state in the blinking state based on the value of the blinking display timer does not change before and after the transition, a different light emission state is temporarily set. Anyway. For example, when shifting from the lighting state to the blinking state, if the light emitting state based on the value of the blinking display timer in the blinking state is the timing when the lighting state is turned on, the light emitting state is temporarily turned off with the transition. . Also, when shifting from the blinking state to the lighting state, if the light emission state based on the value of the blinking display timer in the blinking state is the lighting state, the light-off state is temporarily turned off with the transition. . The time for temporarily changing can be arbitrarily set, and if the time is shorter than 128 ms which is the switching time of the blinking state, short blinking occurs when the state is changed to the blinking state, and the visibility is improved.

  Moreover, although the blinking period is set to 128 ms, the present invention is not limited to this. In particular, if the blinking cycle is shortened, the time until the transition can be recognized when transitioning to or from the blinking state can be shortened. Moreover, you may make it make a blinking period shorter than the other period during the predetermined period which shifted to the blinking state.

  In the above control, the data to be set in the segment area is set by switching the hold display table to be referred to. However, the start memory number information and the blinking display timer information are not referred to the hold display table. Based on this, data may be set directly in the segment area.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is started or ended.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether the magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step S602), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of this embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 milliseconds or longer.

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). Note that the minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, and when the time of the fraud notification ends or is illegal from the beginning. If the notification is not performed, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

And when the prepared magnet fraud flag corresponds with the value of a magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), a magnet fraud monitoring process is complete | finished. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “Step S601; N” → “Step S608” → “Step S609” → “Step S610; Y” → “Step S611” → “Step S612” → “Step S613; Y” is the normal route.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification start / end is set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, in the case of board fraud, the on-board radio sensor 62 is detected once. At this point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the panel radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, −1 unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is “0”. Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If the notification is not made, a command for terminating the board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S708). It is determined whether it matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step S709).

When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared board radio fraud flag does not match the value of the board radio fraud flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area (step S710), and the production command A setting process is performed (step S711), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Here, “Step S701; N” → “Step S705” → “Step S706; Y” → “Step S707” → “Step S708” → “Step S709; Y” is the normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) are displayed. Based on this, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the external information editing process, first, when a glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N), and when a body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N). The off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when a main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 milliseconds) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 ( Step S807). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the main process is started by clearing the RAM, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not “0” (step S808; N), that is, when the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Move on to processing. If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S810 is not performed without performing the process of step S809. Transition.

  If a magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), a panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), a frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), When the electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the big prize opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( In step S816, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, neither the magnet fraud occurs (step S810; N), the board radio wave fraud does not occur (step S811; N), the frame radio wave fraud does not occur (step S812; N), and the ordinary electric power fraud does not occur. (Step S813; N) If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (Step S814; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815). Transition to processing.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process (step S819) for editing a winning signal at the start opening is performed.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S820). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step S821).

When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is “0” (step S821; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area. In step S822, the external information editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not “0” (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the on-data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S821). S823), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the external information editing process described above will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) Processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, unless the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is “0” (step S833).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not “0” (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by −1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area has a main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is selected from the time of the main prize ball signal being on (for example, high level) (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). The on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is “0” (step S833; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0” (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not “0”. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S836; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. A main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main winning ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is sent), and updates ( The main prize ball signal is output for the number of output times set.
For the main award ball signal output for each schedule, the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, so that the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payments. In addition, even if a winning is made during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to the ball running out, etc. Even if the payout is made after the big hit, the Hallcon (Hall Computer) is accurate by the main winning ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step S819) in the external information editing process described above will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the start port signal editing process, first, unless the start port signal output control timer is “0”, −1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is “0” (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843).

If the start port signal output count is not “0” (step S843; N), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (step S844), and the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the time of the ON state (for example, high level) of the start port signal (for example, 128 milliseconds) and the time of the OFF state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 milliseconds). It is an on-state time (for example, 128 milliseconds). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If the start port signal output count is “0” (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843; Y). In step S848, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0” (step S842; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is not “0”. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step S848), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  FIG. 94 shows a display mode displayed during the variation time of the corresponding variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common figure display 53, respectively. In each of the drawings for explaining the display of the collective display device 50, the light emitting portions indicated by shading indicate that they are turned on, and the light emitting portions indicated by white indicate that they are turned off.

  In the special figure 1 indicator 51, during the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, as shown in FIG. This special-figure 1 fluctuation display is composed of eight types of lighting patterns for lighting only one light-emitting part among the eight light-emitting parts included in the special-figure 1 indicator 51.

  The display order of the lighting pattern is an order in which the light emitting units to be lit are displayed so as to transit in the order of D1, D2, D3, D4, D8, D7, D6, and D5. The display time of each lighting pattern is 52 ms, and the time for the special display 1 changing display to make a round is 416 ms. In this first variation display, there is only one light emitting section that is lit regardless of the lighting pattern, and the ratio between the number of light emitting sections that are lit and the number of light emitting sections that are extinguished is always constant. It is designed to enhance the decoration. During the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display is repeatedly performed.

  When the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the display on the special figure 1 display 51 depends on the result of the first special figure variation display game (either one of a plurality of types of hit results or the result of losing). The lighting pattern (result mode) is displayed and the result is displayed. Here, the lighting pattern used as a result mode displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 is made easy to determine that the result mode is displayed as a lighting pattern other than the lighting pattern of the special figure 1 changing display. ing. Of course, a lighting pattern included in the special figure 1 fluctuation display may be used as a result mode. Further, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned to one result, and one selected from among them by a random number or the like may be displayed.

  In the special figure 2 indicator 52, during the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game, as shown in FIG. This special figure 2 change display is a lighting pattern that lights D17, D19, D21, D23, and D25, and a lighting pattern that lights D18, D20, D22, D24, and D26, which are turned on and off. And two lighting patterns. The display time of each lighting pattern is 104 ms, and the time required for the display during the special figure 2 fluctuation is one cycle is 208 ms. In this second variation display, there are four light-emitting parts that are lit in any lighting pattern, and the ratio between the number of light-emitting parts that are turned on and the number of light-emitting parts that are turned off is always constant, and the display has a sense of unity. It is designed to enhance the decoration. During the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display is repeatedly performed.

  When the variation time of the second special figure fluctuation display game is over, the display on the special figure 2 display 52 is in accordance with the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game (either one of a plurality of types of hit results or the result of losing). The lighting pattern (result mode) is displayed and the result is displayed. Here, the lighting pattern used as the result mode displayed on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is made easy to determine that the result mode is displayed as a lighting pattern other than the lighting pattern of the special figure 2 changing display. ing. Of course, a lighting pattern included in the special figure 2 changing display may be used as a result mode. Further, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned to one result, and one selected from among them by a random number or the like may be displayed.

  In the normal map display 53, during the variable time of the normal variable display game, as shown in FIG. The display during normal map display is composed of four types of lighting patterns for lighting only one of the four light emitting units included in the general map display 53.

  The display order of the lighting pattern is an order in which the light emitting units to be lit are displayed so as to transition in the order of D27 → D28 → D30 → D29. The display time of each lighting pattern is 52 ms, and the time for the display to change during normal map change is 208 ms. In this normal display, there is only one light-emitting part that is lit regardless of the lighting pattern, and the ratio between the number of light-emitting parts that are lit and the number of light-emitting parts that are turned off is always constant. It is designed to enhance the decoration. During the fluctuation time of the usual figure change display game, the display during the usual figure change is repeatedly performed.

  When the fluctuation time of the normal map display game is over, the display on the general map display 53 shows a lighting pattern (result) according to the result of the general map display game (either one of a plurality of types of hit results or an off result). And display the result. Here, the lighting pattern used as the result mode displayed on the general map display 53 is made easy to determine that the result mode is displayed as a lighting pattern other than the lighting pattern displayed during the normal map change. . Of course, as a result mode, a lighting pattern included in the display during normal map change may be used. Further, a plurality of lighting patterns may be assigned to one result, and one selected from among them by a random number or the like may be displayed.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes a game for displaying a variation (a normal variation display game, a first special diagram variation display game, a second special diagram variation display game) in which a result is derived after a predetermined variation time. Make. In addition, a first figure memory that is generated based on a winning of a game ball at a starting winning opening 36, a common figure variation display game that is executed based on a usual figure starting memory that is generated when a game ball passes through the usual figure starting gate 34. The first special figure variation display game that is executed based on the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game that is executed based on the second start memory that is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation prize winning device 37 constitutes the start condition. A first variable display game executed based on the establishment of the first start condition or a second variable display game executed based on the establishment of the second start condition satisfying the start condition is formed.

  Further, the collective display device 50 has a display device for displaying a variable display game (a general map variable display game, a first special map variable display game, and a second special map variable display game). The 2 display 52 and the general map display 53 form a first light emitting display unit for displaying the first variable display game or a second light emitting display unit for displaying the second variable display game. In addition, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns that are displayed on the first light-emitting display unit during the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game are displayed during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure 2 fluctuation display, and the normal figure fluctuation display. Are displayed in a predetermined order. A plurality of predetermined lighting patterns displayed on the second light-emitting display unit in the variable time of the first variable display or the second variable display game are displayed in a predetermined order. Display during the second fluctuation.

  In the above-described normal map change display, special figure 1 change display, and special figure 2 change display, each display is cycled so that all the light emitting units included in the display that performs the change display are turned on. Has been. Accordingly, the degree of wear of the light emitting unit can be made uniform, and the light emitting unit that does not turn on due to a failure can be easily found. In addition, in the above-mentioned display during normal map change, special map 1 change display, and special map 2 display during change, it is understood that the display during change is progressing by preventing the lighting patterns of the same light emitting section from being lit continuously. It is easy.

  Further, in the relationship between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the number of light emitting parts included in the special figure 1 display 51 is smaller than the number of light emitting parts included in the special figure 2 display 52. Yes. In addition, the number of lighting patterns included in the first changing display is larger than the number of lighting patterns included in the second changing display, and the time for displaying one lighting pattern in the first changing display is changing in the second. The time for displaying one lighting pattern in the display is shorter. Further, the time taken for the first changing display to make a round is longer than the time taken for the second changing display to make a round.

  By doing so, the display on the special figure 1 display 51 and the display on the special figure 2 display 52 are different, so that the decorativeness in the collective display device 50 is improved and the special figure being executed is displayed. It becomes easy to determine the type of the variable display game.

  In addition, the second special figure variation display game is prioritized over the first special figure variation display game, and in the specific game state (short time state) that can be generated after the special game state, a prize is awarded to the normal variation prize-winning device 37. This makes it easier to generate the second start memory, and the execution time of the special figure variation display game is also shortened. Therefore, during the specific gaming state, the execution frequency of the second special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the first special figure fluctuation display game.

  In this way, by reducing the number of lighting patterns included in the special-figure 2 during-fluctuation display, which is a display during fluctuation of the special-figure fluctuation display game that is frequently executed in the specific gaming state, the special-figure 2 fluctuation display even during a short fluctuation time. This makes it easy to make a round of the movement, so that there is no discomfort in display during fluctuation display and bias in the degree of wear of the light emitting part caused by the fact that the special figure 2 display during fluctuation only progresses partway. It should be noted that the time during which the special figure 2 fluctuation display is completed is shorter than the shortest of the fluctuation times that can be set for the second special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state. Then, at least the special figure 2 changing display is made to make a round.

  In addition, the time for the display during normal map to make a round and the time for the display during special map 2 to make a round are the same time. As a result, when both the normal map fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are in the fluctuation time, the display of the special figure 2 display 52 and the display of the general map display 53 have a certain rhythm. It will change, and it will appear as if it is related to the display of both displays, and the decorativeness of the collective display device 50 will be improved. Further, the fact that the special figure 2 display 52 and the common figure display 53 for performing these displays are provided adjacent to each other contributes to the improvement of the decorativeness of the collective display device 50. This is particularly effective in a specific game state in which the second special figure variation display game is executed at a high frequency.

  In addition, the time for the display during the normal map to make a round is half the time for the display during the special figure 1 to make a round. In other words, the time required for the normal display changing cycle is a divisor of the time required for the special figure 1 changing display cycle. As a result, when both the normal map change display game and the first special map change display game are in the change time, the display of the special map display 51 and the display of the general map display 53 have a certain rhythm. It will change, and it will appear as if it is related to the display of both displays, and the decorativeness of the collective display device 50 will be improved.

  Furthermore, the number of the light emitting parts of the special figure 1 display 51 is twice the number of the light emitting parts of the general figure display 53, and the number of lighting patterns included in one round is also twice. That is, the number of the light emitting parts of the special figure display 51 is a multiple of the number of the light emitting parts of the general display 53, and the number of lighting patterns included in one cycle is the same multiple. In addition, the display during change is a display in which the light-emitting unit that is lit changes in a clockwise direction, and the time for displaying one lighting pattern is the same. These also give a sense of unity to the display of both, and contribute to the improvement of the decorativeness in the collective display device 50. This is particularly effective in a state where the first special figure variation display game is not in a specific gaming state in which the game is frequently executed.

  In this example, the time during which the display during normal map change is set to 208 ms, which is one of the divisors of 416 ms, which is the time required for the display during special figure 1 change, but it is a time for other divisors. There may be. In addition, the number of the light emitting portions of the special figure display 51 is set to 8, which is one of multiples of 4 which is the number of the light emitting portions of the general display 53, but the number is a multiple other than this. Also good. Further, the relation between the special figure 1 display 51 and the common figure display 53 here is such that the ratio of the time during which the display during the change is completed and the ratio of the number of the light emitting portions are in a reciprocal relationship. Further, the decorativeness is further improved, but the reciprocal relationship may not be required.

  Further, at the start of the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display is started from a lighting pattern in which only the light emitting portion D1 is lit. In this case, if the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the deviation that is most frequently derived in the game is a lighting pattern that lights only the light emitting portion D1, the result of the deviation is displayed in the first special figure variation display game. The display portion that is lit when the variation display of the next first special figure variation display game is started from the existing state does not move, and the uncomfortable display at the beginning of the variation display can be eliminated.

  Further, if the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the disconnection is a lighting pattern that lights only the light emitting part D5 that is least frequently used in the variation time, the degree of wear of the light emitting part can be made uniform. Further, the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the disconnection and the lighting pattern when starting the special figure 1 fluctuation display (lighting pattern that lights only D1) are the continuous lighting patterns in the special figure 1 fluctuation display. Therefore, when starting the variation display of the next first special figure variation display game from the state in which the shift result is displayed in the first special figure variation display game, It becomes the same change, and the discomfort in the display at the start of the variable display can be eliminated.

  It should be noted that even when the lighting patterns that do not use D1 to D4, which are frequently used because they are used in the lighting pattern of the first half in the display during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in one round, the degree of wear of the light emitting unit can be made uniform by corresponding to the result of detachment. Effect is obtained. Further, the lighting pattern corresponding to the result of the disconnection may be a lighting pattern that lights a plurality of light emitting units, for example, a lighting pattern that lights D1 and D2, or a lighting pattern that lights D5 and D6. Alternatively, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be assigned as lighting patterns corresponding to the result of the loss, and one of them selected by a random number or the like may be displayed.

  Based on the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game, second special figure fluctuation display game, general figure fluctuation display game) for deriving the result after a predetermined fluctuation time is executed. Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner and controlling execution of the variable display game, and a display apparatus (collective display) for displaying the variable display game controlled by the game control means. The game control means includes a first variable display game (first special figure variable display game, second special game) that forms a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition that forms the start condition. A second fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game, first game) is executed based on the establishment of the second start condition that executes the figure fluctuation display game and the common figure fluctuation display game. 2 Special figure fluctuation table The display device is configured to execute a first variable display game (a special display 1 display 51, a special display 2 display 52, a general display, and a general display variable display game). A display controller 53) and a second light emitting display (a special display 1 display 51, a special display 2 52, a general display 53) for displaying a second variation display game, and a game control means. In the variation time of the first variation display game, a first variation display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order using the first light-emitting display unit (in the special diagram 1 variation) Display, special map 2 display during change, display during normal map change), and during the change time of the second change display game, a plurality of lighting patterns determined in advance using the second light emitting display unit are displayed. Second variable display (displayed in Figure 1) Shows, special symbol 2 variation during the display, and that it is configured to perform control to repeat Hiroshizu variation Showing).

  In addition, the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the special figure 2 display 52) is larger than the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special figure 1 display 51). The number of times that the lighting pattern is updated when the second change display (for example, special figure 2 change display) is made to complete a round is changed over the first change display (for example, special figure 1 change display). And the lighting pattern change interval in the second variation display is longer than the lighting pattern variation interval in the first variation display. It will be controlled to become.

  Further, in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that derives a result after a predetermined variable time based on the establishment of the start condition, a game control unit that performs overall control of the game and performs execution control of the variable display game; And a display device that is controlled by the game control means and displays the variable display game. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) has a plurality of predetermined times during the variable time. The lighting pattern is configured to be repeatedly displayed on the display device (the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common figure display 53) in a predetermined order. In the lighting pattern, the ratio of the number of light-emitting parts that are turned on to the number of light-emitting parts that are turned off is the same for any lighting pattern.

  In addition, the plurality of lighting patterns displayed during the fluctuation time are lighting patterns that are not displayed except for the fluctuation time, and the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time is constant regardless of the lighting pattern.

  Also, a special variable winning device 38 capable of converting the game ball into a closed state where the game ball cannot be won and an open state where the game ball can be won, a closed state where the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and the closed state The game control means (game control device 100) includes a first variation display game and a second variation display game. Based on the result being a special result in one of the predetermined variable display games (for example, the second special figure variable display game) among the variable display games, the special variable winning device 38 is converted to the open state, Based on the result being a special result in the other variation display game (for example, the usual variation display game) of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Into a state, the starting condition of ordinary fluctuation winning device predetermined one variable display game based on the winning to 37 is that it is possible satisfied.

  In addition, it is possible to change the state between a start winning opening 36 through which a game ball can be won, a closed state in which the game ball is hard to win or cannot win, and an open state in which the game ball can easily win or win a game. And a game control means (game control device 100). Is a special game state occurrence that generates a special game state for converting the special variable prize-winning device 38 to an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first variable display game or the second variable display game. Means (game control device 100) and specific game state generating means (game control device 100) capable of generating a specific game state over a predetermined period after the special game state is ended. State occurrence The stage controls the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 so that it is easier to win the normal variation winning device 37 in the specific gaming state than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state, and more than in the case of not being in the specific gaming state. Is also configured to shorten the variation time, and in the specific gaming state, the shortest variation time that can be set for the second variation display game is longer than the time required to complete the second variation display. It will be a long time.

  The first start memory that stores the first start condition based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening 36 is stored, and the second start condition that satisfies the second start condition based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. (2) A start memory means (game control device 100) for storing the start memory is provided, but for either one or both of the first start memory and the second start memory, the execution of the special figure variation display game is suspended. It is also possible not to generate the start memory. If there is a second start memory, the second variable display game based on the second start memory (for example, the second special figure variable display game) is used as the first variable display game based on the first start memory. Although it has priority control means (game control device 100) that executes preferentially over (for example, the first special figure variation display game), the first start memory and the second start memory are digested in the order of occurrence. Also good.

  FIG. 95 shows a modified example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display. In the collective display device 50 according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting unit in the special figure display 51 and the arrangement of the light emitting unit in the general display 53 include a corresponding part that is a symmetric part. . This arrangement having symmetry includes the same arrangement, point-symmetric arrangement, line-symmetric arrangement, and the like. For example, the arrangement of the light emitting parts D1, D2, D5, and D6 in the special figure display 51 is the same as the arrangement of the light emitting parts in the common figure display 53 and is a point-symmetric arrangement. It is also a line-symmetric arrangement. The arrangement relationship of D2, D3, D6, D7 and D3, D4, D7, D8 in the special figure display 51 and the general figure display 53 is the same.

  In addition, the decorativeness is enhanced by providing a relation to the lighting mode in the corresponding portion having a symmetrical relationship. As a lighting mode having a relation, a lighting mode in a light emitting unit (corresponding light emitting unit) at a symmetrical position between both indicators in a corresponding portion having a symmetrical arrangement, before and after the change of the lighting pattern. There is a lighting mode in which all changes are the same and are the same changes.

  Further, as a lighting mode having a relation, the lighting mode before the change of the lighting pattern is symmetric (point symmetry or line symmetry), and the lighting mode after the change of the lighting pattern is also a change having the same symmetry as before the change. In the lighting mode that is a symmetric change or in the course of a predetermined number of consecutive changes, the change in the corresponding part of one display unit and the change in the corresponding part of the other display unit are in reverse order. The lighting mode that changes is also included. In addition, a lighting mode is also included in which turning on and off is reversed to change corresponding to the same change, symmetrical change, or reverse order.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), in the special figure 1 fluctuation display here, the seven light-emitting patterns (1) to (7) for turning on the two light-emitting parts and all the light-emitting parts are turned off ( Eight kinds of lighting patterns of the lighting pattern 8) are sequentially performed.

  In this special figure 1 changing display, the change of the lighting mode in the portions D1, D2, D5, and D6 in the lighting patterns of (1) to (4) is the same as the normal figure changing display shown in FIG. It is the same or point-symmetrical change as the change in lighting mode in the lighting patterns of (1) to (4). That is, the direction in which the light emitting units that are turned on changes by the update of the lighting pattern is the same. In addition, the change in the lighting mode in the portions D3, D4, D7, and D8 in the lighting patterns of (1) to (4) indicates (1) to (4) of the display during normal map change shown in FIG. This is a change that is in line symmetry with the change of the lighting mode in the lighting pattern.

  Thus, by giving a relation to the lighting mode in the corresponding portion having a symmetrical relationship, a sense of unity is produced in the display of both displays, and the decorativeness of the collective display device 50 can be enhanced. In this case, the time for displaying one lighting pattern in the special figure 1 changing display is 52 ms, the time for displaying the one lighting pattern in the normal figure changing display is 104 ms, and the lighting in the special figure 1 changing display is shown. The interval time for updating the pattern is now a divisor of the interval time for updating the lighting pattern in the display during normal fluctuations, but it may be the same time or other divisors. good. In addition, the number of the light emitting portions of the special figure display 51 is set to 8, which is one of multiples of 4 which is the number of the light emitting portions of the general display 53, but the number is a multiple other than this. Also good. Further, the relation between the special figure 1 display 51 and the general figure display 53 here is a relation in which the ratio of the time for updating the lighting pattern in the display during fluctuation and the ratio of the number of the light emitting parts are reciprocal. In order to further enhance the decorativeness, the reciprocal relationship may not be required.

  Even during the special figure 1 fluctuation display, all the light emitting units included in the special figure 1 display 51 are turned on by completing the display. Accordingly, the degree of wear of the light emitting unit can be made uniform, and the light emitting unit that does not turn on due to a failure can be easily found. In addition, in the above-mentioned display during normal map change, special map 1 change display, and special map 2 display during change, it is understood that the display during change is progressing by preventing the lighting patterns of the same light emitting section from being lit continuously. It is easy. Furthermore, it is easy to understand that the display during fluctuation is progressing by including a lighting pattern for turning off all the light emitting units as the lighting pattern.

  FIG. 96 shows another example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display. In the example shown in FIG. 96 (a), the change in the lighting mode in the portions D1, D2, D5, and D6 in the special chart 1 changing display is the same as that in the normal chart changing display shown in FIG. 95 (b). It is the same change by reversing the change, turning on and off. In addition, the change in the lighting mode in the portions D3, D4, D7, and D8 in the special figure 1 changing display shown in FIG. 96 (a) is the change in the lighting display of the normal figure changing display shown in FIG. 95 (b). This is a change in reverse order by turning on and off.

  In the example shown in FIG. 96 (b), the change of the lighting mode in the portions D1, D2, D5, and D6 in the special map 1 changing display is the same as the lighting mode of the normal map changing display shown in FIG. 95 (b). It is a change and a reverse change. In addition, the change in the lighting mode in the portions D3, D4, D7, and D8 in the special chart 1 changing display shown in FIG. 96 (b) is the change in the lighting display of the normal chart changing display shown in FIG. 95 (b). Is the same change.

  FIG. 97 shows another example of a display including a corresponding portion having a symmetrical relationship. In this example, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), the arrangement of the light emitting parts D1 to D8 in the special figure 1 display 51 and the arrangement of the light emitting parts D17 to D24 in the special figure 2 display 52 are symmetrical (here. Is a corresponding part that is a part having line symmetry and point symmetry. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in FIG. 97 (a) each show a state of displaying the result mode of deviation.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a special figure 1 changing display on the special figure 1 display 51, and FIG. 97 (c) shows a special figure 2 changing display on the special figure 2 display 52. The change in the lighting mode in the special figure 1 changing display shown in FIG. 97 (b) is a line-symmetrical and point-symmetric change with the change in the lighting form in the special figure 2 changing display shown in FIG. 97 (c). . It should be noted that the display time of each lighting pattern in the special figure 1 changing display and the special figure 2 changing display is 52 ms.

  In addition, each of the special-figure 1 fluctuation display and the special-figure 2 fluctuation display does not use a part of the light-emitting parts included in the display unit even after one cycle. And as shown to Fig.97 (a), the lighting pattern which lights the display part which is not used by the display during fluctuation | variation becomes a lighting pattern which shows the mode of a result of detachment. Thereby, the degree of wear of each light emitting part can be made uniform.

  FIG. 98 shows another example of the special map 1 changing display and the normal map changing display. In this example, the lighting pattern is changed so that two light emitting units that are lit turn around in the clockwise direction. As described above, in the process of changing the lighting pattern, a change in which the moving modes of the light emitting units that are lit or turned off in both the displays is the same is also a related change.

  FIG. 99 shows another example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display. In this example, the lighting pattern is changed so that the light emitting units adjacent in the clockwise direction are sequentially turned on, and the lighting pattern is changed so that the light emitting units adjacent in the clockwise direction are sequentially turned off after all the light emitting units are turned on. It is supposed to change. In this way, the special figure 1 changing display is performed so that the adjacent light emitting units are sequentially turned on or off according to a certain order or direction, and similarly, the adjacent light emitting units according to the order or direction which are also other indicators. One of the related changes is to make the change to turn on or off sequentially.

  From the above, the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) and the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the general map display 53). Are different numbers, and the time for making a round of the display during the first fluctuation (for example, the display during the fluctuation of the special figure 1) and the time for making the round of the display during the second fluctuation (for example, the display during the fluctuation of the normal map) are the same time. The arrangement of two or more light emitting units that are part or all of the first light emitting display unit and the arrangement of two or more light emitting units that are part or all of the second light emitting display unit are controlled as follows: The corresponding portions are the same or symmetrically arranged, the change in the lighting mode in the corresponding portion of the first light emitting display section in the arbitrary period in the first variation display, and the arbitrary period in the second variation display The change of the lighting mode in the corresponding part of the second light emitting display part in FIG. It can be assumed to be so controlled to be at least one change of the changes made identical, symmetrical or reverse order to reverse the off and reverse change or lighting.

  Further, the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special display 1 display 51) and the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the general display 53) are different numbers. The time during which the first changing display (for example, special figure 1 changing display) makes a round and the time during which the second changing display (for example, normal figure changing display) makes a round are made the same time. Will be controlled.

  In addition, the number of light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit (for example, the special display 1 display 51) is a multiple of the number of light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit (for example, the general display unit 53). The game control means (game control device 100) has a second variable display (e.g., the time during which the lighting pattern is updated in the first variable display (e.g. When the first changing display is cycled, all the light emitting units included in the first light emitting display unit are controlled. Control is performed so that it is lit at least once, and when the second variation display is cycled, all the light emitting units included in the second light emitting display unit are controlled to be lit at least once. Yes.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) may update the lighting pattern update interval in the first changing display (for example, special figure 1 changing display) and the second changing display (for example, special figure 2 changing). Display) and the update interval of the lighting pattern is controlled to be the same time, and at least one of the first changing display and the second changing display is a light emitting unit included in the light emitting display unit that performs display. Thus, display can be performed without using a part of the light emitting units.

  In addition, the game control means (game control device 100) may update the lighting pattern update interval in the first changing display (for example, special figure 1 changing display) and the second changing display (for example, special figure 2 changing). The display pattern is controlled so as to have the same update time interval as the lighting pattern.

  FIG. 100 shows a modification of the collective display device 50. In this collective display device 50, the special figure 2 display 51 for displaying the second special figure fluctuation display game is set to D17 to D20 and D22 to D25, and the second start memory is the right to execute the second special figure fluctuation display game. D2 and D26 are the special figure 2 hold indicators 55 indicating the number of.

  Further, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. D11, D12, and D14 are the second gaming state display units (second gaming state indicator, time-short state notifying unit) 58 that light up when the state occurs and notify the occurrence of the short-time state. Furthermore, the round display part 60 which displays the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the special variable winning device 38) is set to D13, D15, and D16.

  Thus, it becomes easier for the player to understand by providing the display for displaying each variation display game and the holding display for displaying the starting memory number of the variation display game adjacent to each other. Further, when the same collective display device 50 is diverted to gaming machines having different specifications, when there is a variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the execution of the game, the adjacent hold indicator is displayed as the variable display. If it is used as a part of the game display, it is easy because there is no need to change the arrangement of other displays.

  In the above description, the variation display game is executed based on the fact that the variation display game is executed as a variation display game, and a result is obtained after a predetermined variation time based on the establishment of the start condition. Although a so-called one type of variable display game that generates a gaming state has been described, other variable display games may be used. For example, a game ball that has flowed into a winning device that is released based on the result of the variation display game being executed after a predetermined variation time based on the establishment of the start condition is executed and the result of the variation display game becomes a specific result. It may be a so-called two-type variable display game that generates a special gaming state based on winning a specific area in the winning device.

  Further, as in the above-described gaming machine, two independent types of variable display games may be played as the special map variable display game, or one type may be one type and the other type may be two types. Both may be of two types. Also, one type or two types of variable display game may be played as the special figure variable display game. In addition, the normal variation winning device 37 is used as a second start winning opening that can always be won, and the second start memory is generated based on the winning to the second starting winning opening, and the normal variation display game is not performed. You may do it.

  Moreover, although the lighting pattern in which the same light emission part lights is not continued in each change display mentioned above, you may make it the lighting pattern in which the same light emission part lights continue. In addition, exactly the same lighting pattern may be continued, and in this way, the display time of the lighting pattern can be extended.

  Moreover, the number of the light emission parts contained in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common figure display 53 can be set arbitrarily, and of course, it may be comprised only by one light emission part. Further, the special map 1 changing display, the special map 2 changing display, and the normal map changing display are different from each other, but they may be the same display contents. Moreover, although lighting and extinguishing were mentioned as a lighting mode of a light emission part, you may include blinking, the change of emitted light color, etc. besides this. In the case of blinking, the lighting pattern includes the blinking pattern.

  Further, instead of the flashing control timer for controlling the display on the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the general display display 53 on the collective display device 50, the special display 1 hold display 54, You may make it control a display using the blink display timer for controlling the blink state in the special figure 2 hold | maintenance display device 55 and the common figure hold display device 56. FIG. In this case, according to the display update timing required for the display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure display 52, and the general figure display 53, the bit to be referred to in the blinking display timer area is selected, The display is sequentially updated depending on whether the bit is 0 or 1. In this way, the display switching timing on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the general display It is also possible to synchronize the light emission state switching timing in the blinking state on the figure hold indicator 56, and the decorativeness can be improved.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 101 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the main processing, first, processing at the start of the program is performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

  Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

  After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the sound output from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), control of LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, etc. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed, and the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed. Then, an initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 102 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 103 shows a received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetched variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variation command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what variation pattern is to be obtained) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal mode, or the display device 41 For example, an effect display is performed. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 104 shows single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information related to the model set in the game control apparatus 100 (step C261). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting internal information with model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single command processing is performed. Exit.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), whether or not the MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo processing is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the state of the P machine (pachinko machine) is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting effect.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in FIG. 1 suspension (step C269). When MODE is special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure start storage display corresponding to the generated hold is displayed on the display device 41 and the decorative special corresponding to the digested hold is displayed. The special figure 1 hold information setting process for performing the process of erasing the figure start memory display and the like is performed (step C270), and the one-shot system command process is terminated. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, when the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the decoration special figure start storage display corresponding to the generated hold is displayed on the display device 41, and the decorative special corresponding to the digested hold is displayed. The special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing the process of deleting the figure start memory display and the like is performed (step C272), and the single command processing is terminated. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

  In step C271, if the MODE is not the special figure 2 suspension (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not probability information in Step C273 (Step C273; N), it is determined whether the MODE is error / invalid (Step C275). If the MODE is error / illegal (step C275; Y), an error / illegal setting process for performing corresponding processing such as error notification is performed (step C276), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  If the MODE is not an error / incorrect at step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether the MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C278), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not effect mode switching in Step C277 (Step C277; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a symbol stop (Step C279). If MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single command processing is terminated. If MODE is symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In determining whether the command is normal, it is determined, for example, whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a special figure that is currently changing.

  If the command is not normal (step C280; N), the single command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C281). If all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). The single command processing is terminated. Thereby, the change display of the corresponding decorative special figure change display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state. In addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
FIG. 105 shows the look-ahead design command process (step C244) in the received command analysis process described above. In this pre-read symbol command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C302), a prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.

  If the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, if the received prefetched symbol-related command relates to special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. The special drawing 2 prefetched symbol command area is saved (step C303), the prefetching variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetched symbol command processing is terminated. The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
FIG. 106 shows the look-ahead variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch fluctuation command reception is awaited (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting. If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not waiting (step C311; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C311; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C312).

  Thereafter, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C313), and information on the special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set in accordance with the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

  Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C314). Further, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the sub-in-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C316).

  The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds. For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

  In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects of the same type of reach, such as the case where the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the winning case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

  Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317). If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C317; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated because of an abnormal command value. On the other hand, when the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C317; Y), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (step C318), and MODE is set. And pre-read command consistency check processing (step C319) for determining whether the combination of ACT and command (command combination) is normal.

  If the command combination is not normal (step C320; N) as a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C319), the prefetch variation command process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C321) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

  When no pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; N), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), it is specified that the execution in the special figure fluctuation display game that has not yet been executed is determined in advance before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is determined whether it is a production (step C323).

  If it is not a specific effect (step C323; N), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch notice effect is set (step C324), and the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. The pre-reading notice effect in this case is a pending change notice or the like for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time.

  If it is a specific effect (step C323; Y), the pre-reading notice effect of all the targeted games is set (step C325), and the specific effect flag is saved (step C326). Further, the final flag is saved in the area of the specific effect information storage area corresponding to the start-up memory (step C327), and the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

  For example, the prefetching notice effect to be generated (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure variation display games, In the case of a specific effect such as an effect of performing a notice by a character appearing during variable display, in step C325, the execution of the pre-read notice effect is determined for the effect content executed in each special figure variable display game that is the target of the pre-read notice effect. When it is done, it is set in advance.

  In addition, regarding the pending change notice for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time, when the display mode is further changed in the special figure variation display game until the start memory is consumed. In addition, at which timing the change is performed may be set in advance. Further, if it is a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display at a timing later than the current time, the timing of the change may be set in advance.

  In FIG. 107, the execution of the specific effect is determined for a specific effect that is an effect determined in advance before the start of the special map variable display game to be executed in the special map variable display game that has not yet been executed. The specific effect information storage area set in the RAM 322 for storing information set in advance is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the specific effect information storage area, the areas 1a to 1d associated with the digestion order for each start memory in the first start memory (special figure 1), and the second start memory ( For each starting memory of FIG. 2), there are provided eight areas 2a to 2d associated with the digestion order. In addition, a running area for storing information on a specific performance currently being executed is provided. When the execution of the specific effect is determined, the content of the specific effect in the special figure variation display game based on each start memory is determined in step C325, and information is stored in the corresponding area.

  FIG. 107 (b) shows a case where a countdown notice is set as a pre-reading notice effect that makes a specific effect for the first start memory. In this case, when the first start memory having the fourth digestion order is generated, execution of the pre-reading notice effect for the start memory is determined. Then, based on the execution of the specific effect, the contents of the effect in each special figure variation display game are determined for the first to fourth start-up memories that are subject to the pre-reading notice effect, and the specific effect information storage area Information is stored in the corresponding area.

  For the first start memory having the first and second digestion orders, the countdown notice “No display” is set. As a result, the countdown notice is not displayed in the special figure variation display game based on these start-up memories. However, since the information is set in the specific effect information storage area, it can be understood that it is the execution period of the specific effect. As described above, it is possible to set in advance that the effect is not executed, thereby preventing an effect that contradicts the countdown notice to be executed later.

  Further, for the first start memory having the third digestion order, the countdown notice “Count 1” is set. As a result, in the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory, an effect of displaying “1” indicating that it is one before the special figure variation display game to be notified is executed. For the first start memory having the fourth digestion order, a countdown notice “count 0” is set. As a result, in the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory, an effect of displaying “0” indicating that the special figure variation display game to be notified is executed.

  It should be noted that no information is stored in the active area at the time when the specific effect is not started. Every time the special figure variation display game that is the target of the specific effect is started, the digestion information of the first start memory digestion order first area information and the second start memory digestion order first area information is digested. The information of the area corresponding to the start memory thus recorded is copied to the executing area. As a result, the information in the copy source area is deleted, and the information in the digestion order 2 to 4 is carried up one by one.

  FIG. 107 (c) shows a case where the continuous notice is set as the pre-reading notice effect that makes a specific effect for the second start memory. In this case, when the second start memory having the fourth digestion order is generated, execution of the pre-reading notice effect for the start memory is determined. Then, for the first to fourth start memories that are subject to the pre-reading notice effect, the effect contents in each special figure variation display game are determined, and information is stored in the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area. The In this example, it is set so that the first to fourth effects of the continuous notice are sequentially performed according to the digestion order.

  Although the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the reception of the prefetch command, the execution of the specific effect is determined at an arbitrary timing, and the content of the specific effect in the special figure variation display game based on each start memory is determined. Then, information may be stored in the specific effect information storage area. Also, it is possible to set an effect that is not a pre-reading notice effect as a specific effect without being based on the information of the pre-read command, for example, a special figure change based on the first start memory whose digestion order is the fourth at present. It is also possible to set an effect in the display game. In this case, the execution of the effect can be set even if the start memory that is the target of the effect has not yet occurred, and information may be stored in the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 108 shows the symbol-based command process (step C240) in the received command analysis process described above. In this symbol command processing, first, a special symbol type (either special graph 1 or special graph 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and a symbol type corresponding to a combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and the symbol-type command processing ends.

  The symbol type is a category of symbols such as outlier symbol, 16R probability variable A big hit symbol, 16R probability variable B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R normal variable big hit symbol, 4R probability variable big hit symbol, small hit symbol, etc. Associated with data. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. And the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 109 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether they are inconsistent (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a symbol category. For example, the symbol type includes, for example, an off symbol, 16R probability variation A big hit symbol, 16R probability variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R probability variable big hit symbol, small There are winning designs. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the effect is the same as when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A big hit symbol is received although the variation command (variation pattern command) of the deviation is received. It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type) that conflicts with the above.

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, variation effect setting processing for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process is terminated. In addition, since it is possible to manage the number of executions and the end of the pre-reading notice effect based on the information in the specific effect information storage area, it is possible to manage the specific effect without setting the number of pre-read effects.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 110 shows the changing effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described changing command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the presenting mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without reach, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

  Next, referring to the first-half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a first half notice setting process for setting a notice that appears during the first half change is performed (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the notice that appears during the first half change is set. The first half notice setting process is performed (step C386).

  Next, the notice effect of the second half change is drawn. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the variable effects corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effects corresponding to the notice lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the variation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure variation display game are determined. Further, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content is performed (step C392).

  Next, the display setting of the fluctuating effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). With these processes, it is possible to execute effects and notices in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above. Then, a sound number which is a BGM number, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, etc. is set (step C395), and a decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (variation display of identification information) is set. Display setting is performed (step C396). Furthermore, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decorative special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the fourth symbol variation display setting corresponding to the special symbol type is set. (Step C397) and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[First half notice setting process]
FIG. 111 shows the first half notice setting process (step C386) in the above-described variation effect setting process. In the first half notice setting process, first, there is a specific effect flag that is set when execution of the specific effect is determined and cleared at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the last start memory that is the target of the specific effect. Is determined (step C551). If there is no specific effect flag (step C551; N), a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed (step C558), and the first half notice setting process is terminated. In this process, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice grouping table. In this case, the specific effect is not selected.

  If there is a specific effect flag (step C551; Y), the digest order in the special figure type (special figure type for executing the special figure variable display game this time) targeted for the specific effect information storage area as the first half notice effect Is set to the effect stored in the first area (step C552). Thus, the first half notice effect is set based on information preset when it is determined to execute the specific effect. Next, the information of the region having the first digestion order is copied to the executing region (step C553), and it is determined whether there is a final flag set in the start-up memory to be notified (step C554).

  When there is no final flag (step C554; N), that is, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the current special figure fluctuation display game executes a specific effect (if the prefetching notice effect, the special figure fluctuation display game to be notified) If not, the process proceeds to step C556. Also, if there is a final flag (step C554; Y), that is, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the current special figure fluctuation display game executes a specific effect (if the pre-reading notice effect, the special figure fluctuation display to be notified) If it is a game, the specific effect flag is cleared (step C555), and the process proceeds to step C556. Then, the information of the target special figure type area is shifted to the area where the digestion order is one earlier (step C556), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step C557), and the first half notice setting process is ended.

  In the state where the specific effect flag is cleared, the specific effect is not set with reference to the specific effect information storage area. Thereby, even if information remains in the specific effect information storage area for some reason, the effect is not set based on this information, and the execution of the unintended specific effect can be prevented.

  Through the above processing, the specific effect is set based on information preset in the specific effect information storage area. Although the specific effect is performed during the first half change, the specific effect may be performed during the second half change, or the specific effect may be performed over the first half and the second half. However, in order to perform a specific effect during the latter half of the fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation display game needs to reach, so only the starting memory that has been determined to be a reach based on the pre-reading information has a specific effect during the latter half of the fluctuation. The information is set and stored in the specific effect information storage area.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Information Setting Processing]
FIG. 112 shows the special figure 1 hold information setting process (step C270) in the single-shot command process described above. In the special figure 1 hold information setting process, first, the currently stored special figure 1 hold number is loaded and set as the previous hold number (step C501), and the command value is set in the special figure 1 hold number as the new hold number. (Step C502), it is determined whether the number of new reservations and the number of previous reservations are the same (Step C503).

  If the new hold number and the previous hold number are the same (step C503; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated. If the new pending number and the previous pending number are not the same (step C503; N), the index of the motion control table for holding corresponding to the new pending number is calculated and saved (step C504), and the scenario layer number 6 is set. Prepare (step C505). Furthermore, the address of the special figure 1 hold scenario data table (hold X) is prepared (step C506), and scenario data setting processing is performed (step C507). By this process, display or deletion of the decorative special figure start memory display associated with the increase or decrease of the number of holds, and the decorative display (animation) associated therewith are set. If a new start memory is generated during the decoration display, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the new start memory and the decoration display are executed after the execution of the decoration display being executed. Set.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased (step C508). If the number has increased (step C508; Y), a display pattern of holding normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of holdings (step C509). . Thereby, the display in the normal display mode in which the pre-reading notice effect or the like is not performed is set for the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory generated this time. Note that the prefetching notice effect in the decoration special figure start memory display is set by prefetching variation command processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the P machine state is a big hit (step C510). If it is a big hit (step C510; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step C510; N), an output request for a start opening winning sound is requested (step C511), and the special figure 1 hold information setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of reservations has not increased (step C508; N), that is, when it has decreased, the special figure 1 prefetch information area is shifted (step C512) and the color information area is shifted (step C513). FIG. 1 The hold information setting process is terminated.

  Note that the start opening winning sound is output when it is not a big hit, but the start opening winning sound is output only when the blinking state starts or ends as the display state of the special figure 1 hold indicator 54. You may make it do. When the blinking state starts or ends, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the light emission state is the same before and after the transition, but it is difficult to recognize whether or not the transition has occurred. Can be resolved. Further, the start opening winning sound may be output only when the blinking state is started and the light emission state is the same before and after the transition.

[Special Figure 2 Hold Information Setting Process]
FIG. 113 shows the special figure 2 hold information setting process (step C272) in the single-shot command process described above. In this special figure 2 hold information setting process, the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 hold information setting process is performed for the second start-up storage. This process is similar to the hold information setting process.

  If the number of holds increases (step C528; Y), it is determined whether there is a specific effect flag (step C532). If there is no specific effect flag (step C532; N), the special figure 2 hold information is determined. The setting process ends. If there is a specific effect flag (step C532; Y), whether the target is the special figure 1 (first start memory), that is, the last special figure change display game (the pre-reading notice effect) that executes the specific effect. If there is a special figure variation display game to be notified (if any), it is determined whether it is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory (step C533).

  If the target is not the special figure 1 (step C533; N), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is terminated. If the target is the special figure 1 (step C533; Y), the information of the execution area of the specific effect information storage area is copied to the corresponding area (step C534), and the special figure 2 hold information setting process is performed. finish. Thus, in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interrupting, the specific effect being executed is repeatedly performed.

  By copying the information in this way, it is possible to produce an effect that is easy for the player to recognize without any contradiction with simple control. Further, when starting the special figure variation display game based on the new second start memory generated during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the progress degree of the specific effect (how many times it is currently, etc.) ) Need not be referred to each time, and the control burden can be reduced.

  FIG. 114 shows an example of a decoration display (animation) when the start-up memory is digested and decreases. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 for displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas.

  In addition, a memory display unit 83 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided at the lower center of the display area. The memory display unit 83 is provided with a first memory display unit 83a for displaying the first start memory and a second memory display unit 83b for displaying the second start memory. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display portion 83a corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order. Here, there are four first start memories. It is shown that. The decoration special figure start memory display at the left end is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left whenever digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode.

  In addition, the second memory display unit 83b displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory one-on-one in the same manner as the first memory display unit 83a. In FIG. 114 (a), a pre-reading effect is performed to change the display mode of the decorative special-purpose start memory display for the second start memory having the third digestion order.

  On the left side of the first memory display unit 83a, a running memory display unit 84 that displays information related to the startup memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. The special display starting memory display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a or the second storage display section 83b is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game and executed. The result of the change display game, the change pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode.

  In the upper right part of the display area, a start memory number display unit 86 for displaying the start memory number is provided. The starting memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first starting memory number display unit 86a that displays the number of first starting memories, and a second starting memory number display unit 86b that displays the number of second starting memories. ing.

  When the second start memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 114 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the second memory display portion 83b is displayed as the second memory display as shown in FIG. 114 (b). The display jumps out to the upper left of the section 83b and flows into the running storage display section 84 as shown in FIG. 114 (c). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 114 (b) and 114 (c), in the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 86b decreases and an enlarged display is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85 starts a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start-up memory. Further, in the second memory display unit 83b, the decorative special figure start memory display pops out above the second memory display unit 83b as shown in FIG. 114 (d), and left one by one as shown in FIG. 114 (e). The display to return to the second storage display unit 83b is performed so as to shift to the position.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), with the digestion of the second start memory, the decoration special figure start memory display of the second memory display portion 83b is shifted to the left one by one from the state of FIG. 114 (a). At the same time, the numerical value of the second start memory number display portion 86b is decreased by one. In the case of the first start-up memory, the same decoration display is performed.

  FIG. 115 shows an example of a decoration display (animation) when the start memory is generated and increased. When the second start memory is generated from the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), as shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and 115 (c), a new decorative special figure start memory display is displayed below the second memory display portion 83b. From the lower side of the position where the symbol is displayed, the decoration special figure start memory display appears and the display moves upward. Further, in the second starting memory number display portion 86b, as shown in FIGS. 115 (b) and 115 (c), the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b increases and an enlarged display is performed.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (d), as the second start memory increases, the decorative special figure start memory display is increased by one on the second memory display portion 83b from the state of FIG. 115 (a). At the same time, the numerical value of the second start memory number display portion 86b is increased by one. In the case of the first start-up memory, the same decoration display is performed.

  116 and 117 show an example of the process of setting and executing a specific effect. As shown in FIG. 116, in the state where there are four first start memories Z, A, B, and C (t11), the game Z, which is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory Z, is started. (T12). At this time, no information is stored in the specific effect information storage area (see FIG. 117 (a)).

  During the execution of the game Z, a new first start memory D is generated, and execution of a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect) for the first start memory D is determined (t13). At this time, with respect to the first start memories A to D subject to the pre-reading notice effect, the effect contents in each special figure variation display game are determined, and information is stored in the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area (FIG. 117 (b)).

  And the game Z is complete | finished and the game A which is a special figure fluctuation display game based on the 1st start memory A is started (t14). The game A to the game D become a specific effect period in which the specific effect is executed based on the information stored in the specific effect information storage area. At the start of the game A, the countdown notice “No display” is given as a specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game with reference to the information stored in the first area of the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area. Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. Thus, although it is a specific production period, the period when it is selected not to display a specific production serves as a waiting period. Further, since the digest order of D from the first start memory B is advanced with the digest of the first start memory A, the first information in the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area is deleted. At the same time, the subsequent information in the first start memory is carried up one by one (see FIG. 117 (c)).

  Thereafter, the game A ends, and the game B, which is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory B, is started (t15). At the start of the game B, with reference to the information stored in the first area of the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area, the countdown notice “No display” is displayed as the specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game. Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. Further, since the digest order of the first start memories C and D is advanced as the first start memory B is digested, the first information in the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area is deleted. At the same time, the subsequent information in the first start-up memory is incremented one by one (see FIG. 117 (d)).

  When the game B ends, the game C, which is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory C, is started (t16). At the start of the game C, with reference to the information stored in the first digestion sequence area of the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area, the countdown notice “Count 1” is specified as the specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game. Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. Thereby, in the game C, an effect of displaying “1” indicating that the game is immediately before the special figure variation display game to be notified is executed. As described above, the period in which the specific effect is displayed and the display of the specific effect is selected is the execution period. Further, since the digestion order of the first start memory D is moved up with the digestion of the first start memory C, the first information in the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased, The subsequent information in the first start-up memory is incremented one by one (see FIG. 117 (e)).

  When the game C is finished, the game D, which is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory D, is started (t17). At the start of the game D, with reference to the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area, the countdown notice “Count 0” is specified as the specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game. Is set. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. Thereby, in the game D, an effect of displaying “0” indicating that it is a special figure variation display game to be notified is executed. Further, with the digestion of the first start memory D, the first information in the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area is deleted (see FIG. 117 (f)).

  The first start memory D is a start memory for executing the last special figure variation display game (a special figure variation display game to be notified in the case of a pre-reading notice effect) for executing the specific effect. On the other hand, the final flag is set. Thereby, it can be grasped that the specific effect ends in the current special figure fluctuation display game, the specific effect flag is cleared, and the specific effect ends. Then, when the game D is completed, the information on the running area is cleared (see FIG. 9A).

  118 and 119 also show an example of the process of setting and executing a specific effect. 118 is different from FIG. 116 in that the second start memory is generated and digested at t21, t22, t23, and t24, and the other parts are the same as in FIG. The reference numerals are attached and the description is omitted.

  When the game Z is ended and the game A, which is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory A, is started (t14), the first start memory digestion sequence in the specific effect information storage area is the first area. A countdown notice “no display” is set as a specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game with reference to the stored information. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the first start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. Further, since the digestion order of D from the first start memory B is advanced with the digestion of the first start memory A, the first information in the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area is deleted. At the same time, the subsequent information in the first start-up memory is incremented one by one (see FIGS. 119 (a) and 117 (c)).

  When the second start memory E is generated during the execution of the game A (t21), the information on the area under execution is copied to the first digestion order area of the second start memory which is an area corresponding to the second start memory E. (See FIG. 119 (b)). When the game A ends, the game E, which is a special figure fluctuation display game based on the second start memory E, is started (t22). Accordingly, the countdown notice “no display” is set as the specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game with reference to the information stored in the first area of the digestion order of the second start memory in the specific effect information storage area. Is done. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the second start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. Further, with the digestion of the second start memory E, the first information in the digest order in the second start memory in the specific effect information storage area is deleted (see FIG. 119 (c)). That is, when a new second start memory is generated during execution of a specific effect for the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, the specific effect being executed is selected based on the second start memory. It can also be executed in the figure variation display game.

  In addition, when the game E is started after the game E is finished, and the game B is finished and the game C, which is a special figure variation display game based on the first start memory C, is started (t16), the specific effect information storage area The countdown notice “Count 1” is set as a specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game with reference to the information stored in the first digestion order first area of the first start memory. In addition, the information stored in the first digestion order first area in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the execution area (see FIGS. 119 (d) and 117 (e)). Thereby, in the game C, an effect of displaying “1” indicating that the game is immediately before the special figure variation display game to be notified is executed. Further, since the digestion order of the first start memory D is moved up with the digestion of the first start memory C, the first information in the digest order in the first start memory in the specific effect information storage area is erased, The subsequent information in the first start memory is carried up one by one (see FIG. 119 (d) and FIG. 117 (e)).

  When the second start memory F is generated during the execution of the game C (t23), the information on the area under execution is copied to the first digestion order area of the second start memory (see FIG. 119 (f)). When the game C is over, the game F, which is a special figure variation display game based on the second start memory F, is started (t24). Accordingly, the countdown notice “count 1” is set as the specific effect to be executed in the special figure variation display game with reference to the information stored in the first area of the digestion order of the second start memory in the specific effect information storage area. Is done. In addition, the information stored in the first area of the digest order in the second start-up memory in the specific effect information storage area is copied to the executing area. As the second start memory F is consumed, the first information in the digest order in the second start memory in the specific effect information storage area is deleted (see FIG. 119 (f)).

  When a new second start memory is generated during the execution of the game E or the game F, the information on the area under execution is copied to the corresponding area of the specific effect information storage area. In the special figure variation display game based on this, the specific effect currently being executed is repeatedly performed. In addition, even when a plurality of new second start memories are generated during one game, the information on the running area is copied to each of the specific effect information storage areas. In the figure variation display game, a specific effect currently being executed is repeatedly performed.

  However, if the second start memory is generated during the execution of the game D, which is the last special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation display game subject to notice in the case of the pre-reading notice effect) to execute the specific effect, Since the specific effect flag is cleared at the start of the game D, the information on the running area is not copied for the second start memory. Therefore, the specific effect is not executed in the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. Note that even when the specific effect flag is cleared, the specific effect is not executed in the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory.

  Further, for example, when the result of the special figure change display game executed by interrupting the game E or the game F becomes a special result, the specific effect flag is cleared. This prevents the specific effect from being resumed after the special gaming state ends. In this case, the information in the specific effect information storage area may be cleared, but if the specific effect flag is cleared, the information in the specific effect information storage area is not referred to, and a new When the execution of the specific effect is set, the information in the specific effect information storage area is overwritten. Therefore, the information in the specific effect information storage area may not be cleared.

  Further, in the special figure variation display game based on the new second start memory generated during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the specific effect that was being executed when the second start memory was generated is repeated. Although it is performed, the same effect as the specific effect that was being performed may be performed, or a part of the effect may be changed. For example, the effect display, the background color and content, and the sound may be different. As an example of changing the contents of the effect display, when the count 1 announcement of the countdown notice is repeated, every time the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory is executed, “count 1-1” → “count 1” -2 ”→“ Count 1-3 ”, changing a part of the value. Further, the value may be changed as “count 0.9” → “count 0.8” → “count 0.7”.

  In addition, the special effect may not be executed in the special figure variation display game based on the new second start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect for the first start memory. Further, according to the contents of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory to be notified, whether or not to execute the specific effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the second start memory may be selected. good. For example, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory to be notified is a special result, the specific effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the second start memory than when the special result is not obtained. To be more likely.

  Further, in the special figure variation display game based on the new second start memory generated during the execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the contents of the specific effect to be executed later may be suggested or notified. good. Since the content of the specific effect is already determined and stored in the specific effect information storage area, it is possible to suggest or notify the content with reference to this information. In particular, if the display period is a specific production period but the display has not started, it is possible to notify the user by suggesting that the specific production will be executed later or displaying the contents in a digest. It is.

  In addition, when the execution of the specific effect is determined, the content of the specific effect in the special figure variation display game based on each start memory is determined, but other information may be determined in advance. good. For example, you may determine the stop symbol of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure fluctuation display game based on each start memory. In this case, it is possible to set an effect based on the stop symbol, such as setting the same stop symbol in all the special symbol variation display games, or reducing the value of the middle symbol one by one as in the countdown notice. . In addition, when a new second start memory is generated during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the special symbol based on the second start memory is used as the stop pattern of the special map variable display game being executed. You may make it copy and set the information of a stop symbol so that it may become a stop symbol of a variable display game. However, if the stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a special result, it is not copied.

  In addition, although the specific effect is set for the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific effect may be set for the normal figure fluctuation display game. In the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect of the general map change display game as this specific effect, the pre-reading process for determining information such as the result before the start of the general map change display game based on the general map start memory for the general map start memory To do. In addition, the specific effect for the normal map display game and the specific effect for the special map display game may be executed simultaneously, or may not be executed at the same time.

  Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning area (the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the ordinary start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game is the special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player in the event that it becomes a predetermined upper limit of the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning area A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a number together with a random number value, and a game for determining the result of the variable display game based on the random number value stored as the start storage in the start storage means and executing the variable display game Executing in the execution means (game control device 100) and the variable display game that has not yet been executed is an effect that is determined in advance before the start of the variable display game. And an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect, and when the effect control means decides to execute the specific effect, the effect control means executes in each of the variable display games that are the targets of the specific effect. The execution content of the specific effect is set in advance. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that the player can easily recognize with no contradiction by simple control. In addition, it is not necessary to refer to the degree of progress of the current specific performance (eg, how many times it is currently), and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the control unit includes pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the random number value stored as the start memory in the start storage means before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed. It is possible to determine to execute the specific effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means. Therefore, it is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests or notifies the determination result of the prior determination means.

  The start winning area includes a first start winning area (start winning port 36) and a second start winning area (ordinary variable winning device 37), and the start storage means is a game in the first start winning area. The first start memory is stored as the start memory based on the detection of the ball, the second start memory is stored as the start memory based on the detection of the game ball in the second start winning area, and the game execution means stores the second start memory. In some cases, the variation display game based on the second start memory is configured to be executed preferentially over the variation display game based on the first start memory, and the effect control means includes the variation display game based on the first start memory. When a new second start memory is generated during execution of the specific effect for the display game, the specific effect being executed can be executed also in the variable display game based on the second start memory. It will be. Therefore, even if the variable display game based on the second start memory is interrupted during the execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the specific effect can be prevented from being interrupted.

  Further, when the effect control means decides to execute the specific effect, the effect control means presets a stop symbol to be displayed as a result mode for each of the variable display games that are targets of the specific effect, and is based on the first start memory. When a new second start memory is generated during execution of the specific effect for the variable display game, a stop pattern of the variable display game based on the second start memory is used as a stop pattern of the variable display game being executed. It is possible to have the same stop symbol as. Therefore, the stop symbol can also be a part of the specific effect, and the entertainment of the game can be improved. In addition, when the variable display game based on the second start memory is interrupted during execution of the specific effect for the first start memory, the same stop symbol is used, so that a process for determining the stop symbol is not required and control is performed. The burden can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the board effect device 44 will be described. FIG. 2 shows a first board effect device 44a, a second board effect device 44b, and a third board effect device 44c, which are board effect devices 44 that produce games including special figure variation display games by operating. There is an effect actor switch 47 for detecting the state at the initial position, and the effect control device 300 can detect whether or not it is at the initial position. Then, when performing the operation of the board effect device 44, if the board effect device 44 performing the operation is not in the initial position, processing corresponding to this is performed.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of the operation of the first board effect device 44a. Here, as shown in the upper row as scheduled operations, effects (t61 to t62, t63 to t65, t66 to t67, t68 to t69) are scheduled to be performed intermittently a plurality of times from the initial position to return to the initial position. It has become. In addition, the decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 that constitute the light emission effect device capable of performing the light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member is in accordance with the operation of the first panel effect device 44a. Is scheduled to be performed. Note that the decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 can execute the effect by light emission independently even during the period when the light emission effect according to the operation of the first panel effect device 44a is not performed.

  However, as shown in the lower stage as an actual operation, the operation started from the initial position (t61), but the first board rendering device 44a does not operate normally for some reason, and the initial operation is also performed at the next scheduled operation timing (t63). It has not returned to the position. In this case, after returning to the initial position (t64), all subsequent scheduled operations are not performed. However, for the decoration LED, a light emission effect is performed at a scheduled timing.

  FIG. 121 shows an example of operations of the first board effect device 44a, the second board effect device 44b, and the third board effect device 44c. As shown in FIG. 121 (a), here, as a scheduled operation, first board effect device 44a first operates from the initial position (t71), returns to the initial position (t72), and then second plate effect device 44b. The third board production device 44c operates from the initial position (t73) and returns to the initial position (t74). Further, the decoration LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 perform corresponding light emission effects in accordance with the operation of the first board effect device 44a (t71 to t72), and the second board effect device 44b and the third board effect. A corresponding light emission effect is scheduled to be performed in accordance with the operation of the device 44c (t73 to t75).

  However, as shown as an actual operation, the first board effect device 44a was operated from the initial position (t71), but it did not operate normally for some reason, and the second board effect device 44b and the third board effect device 44c. Even in the scheduled operation timing (t73), the initial position has not been returned. In this case, the second board effect device 44b whose operation range does not overlap with the first board effect device 44a is operated as planned because there is no problem of collision even if it operates (t73 to t75).

  In addition, there is a possibility that a problem such as a collision occurs when the third board effect device 44c whose operation range overlaps with the first board effect device 44a is operated. Therefore, the start of the operation is waited until the first board effect device 44a returns to the initial position (t74), and the operation scheduled from here is performed (t74 to t76). That is, the end of the operation is delayed by the same time (t75 to t76) and the end of the operation is delayed by the same time (t75 to t76). In the display device 41, a specific standby effect is displayed during a period (t73 to t74) in which the operation of the third board effect device 44c is delayed. As a result, a sense of incongruity does not occur between the display on the display device 41 and the operation of the third board effect device 44c. Note that the decoration LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 perform a light emission effect at a scheduled timing regardless of the operation of the panel effect device 44.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), if the time (t73 to t74) for which the first board rendering device 44a waits for the start of the operation until it returns to the initial position is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, The operation of the third board effect device 44c that has been performed is not performed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation from being performed at a timing greatly deviated from the scheduled timing, the operation not being completed before the end of the special figure variation display game, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

[Moving object control processing]
FIG. 122 shows the movable body control process (step C19) in the main process described above. In this movable body control process, first, the first board effect device is set as a processing target (step C601), and a standby setting process is performed (step C602). Thereafter, the second board effect device is set as a processing target (step C603), standby setting processing is performed (step C604), and the third board effect device is set as a processing target (step C605), and standby setting processing is performed. (Step C606). Then, an operation control process for controlling the motor and the solenoid to perform the set operation is performed (step C607), and the movable body control process is terminated. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the operation of the board effect device 44 that forms the movable effect device.

[Standby setting processing]
FIG. 123 shows standby setting processing (steps C602, C604, and C606) in the above-described movable body control processing. In this standby setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an operation standby flag (step C611). The operation waiting flag is a flag that is set when waiting for the start of the operation. A first operation standby flag, a second operation standby flag, and a third operation standby flag are prepared for each of the first board presentation device 44a, the second board presentation device 44b, and the third board presentation device 44c. A flag corresponding to the board effect device 44 that is waiting for the start of is set. For example, when waiting for the start of the operation of the first board rendering device 44a, the first operation standby flag is set. In addition, the own operation standby flag is a flag that is set when the operation of the board rendering device 44 that is the current processing target is waiting, for example, a standby setting process (step C602). For example, the first operation standby flag set when waiting for the operation of the first board rendering device 44a becomes its own operation standby flag.

  When there is this own operation waiting flag (step C611; Y), that is, when waiting for its own operation, the process proceeds to step C613. When there is no own operation waiting flag (step C611; N), it is determined whether it is the own operation start timing (step C612). The own operation start timing is the operation start timing set at the start of the special figure variation display game. For example, in the case of the first board effect device 44a, t61, t63, t66, t68 in FIG. 120 and t71 in FIG. 121 are the operation start timings. When the operation start timing is not reached (step C612; N), the standby setting process ends. If it is the start timing of its own operation (step C612; Y), it is determined whether it is in the initial position (step C613).

  If it is not in the initial position (step C613; N), the subsequent operation is canceled (step C621), its own operation standby timer is cleared (step C622), and its operation standby flag is cleared. (Step C623), the standby setting process is terminated. That is, in this case, it is a case where it is waiting for its own operation or is not in the initial position despite its own operation start timing, and there is some abnormality in its own operation. Therefore, the setting is made so as not to perform its own operation, and the operation waiting flag and the timer for measuring the operation waiting time are cleared.

  In addition, when canceling the subsequent actions of itself, it may not be performed only for the special figure fluctuation display game, or it may not be performed for several games from the special figure fluctuation display game. Alternatively, the operation may not be performed until the power of the gaming machine is turned on again. In this case, error notification may be performed by a gaming machine, or the occurrence of an error may be notified to an external device such as a pedestal machine or a hall computer.

  If it is in the initial position (step C613; Y), it is determined whether the interfering object is in the initial position (step C614). In the present embodiment, the first board effect device 44a and the third board effect device 44c interfere with each other. If the interfering object is in the initial position (step C614; Y), it is determined whether or not its own operation waiting flag is present (step C615). If there is no own operation waiting flag (step C615; N), the operation is performed. Start is set (step C618), and the standby setting process is terminated. In this case, the operation starts as scheduled. Information necessary for the operation is set by setting the operation start, and actual operation control is performed in the operation control process (step C607) based on this information.

  If there is an own operation waiting flag (step C615; Y), the own operation waiting timer is cleared (step C616), the own operation waiting flag is cleared (step C617), and the operation start is set. (Step C618), the standby setting process is terminated. In this case, it is waiting for its own operation, but since the operation is possible, the operation is started.

  On the other hand, when there is no interfering object at the initial position (step C614; N), it is determined whether or not there is an operation standby flag (step C619), and when there is no operation standby flag (step C619; N). The initial value is saved in its own operation standby timer for measuring the time waiting for its own operation (step C624), its own operation standby flag is set (step C625), and the standby setting process is terminated. To do. Thereby, the period for waiting for its own operation is started.

  If there is an own operation waiting flag (step C619; Y), it is determined whether the own operation waiting timer has expired (step C620). If the time is not up (step C620; N), the standby setting process ends. When the time is up (step C620; Y), the subsequent operation is canceled (step C621), the operation standby timer is cleared (step C622), and the operation standby flag is cleared (step C622). Step C623), the standby setting process is terminated. That is, in this case, the time for waiting for its own operation is a predetermined time or more. In this case, its own operation is not performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a time measuring unit that measures the time for delaying the start of the operation of one movable effect member.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the interfering board effect device 44 waits for its own operation until it returns to the initial position. However, if it can be detected that the board has moved to a position where it does not interfere, it moves to a position where it does not interfere. You may make it start own operation | movement. Further, even if the board effect device 44 that interferes is in a position where there is a possibility of interference, the operation may be performed if the operation range of the current effect does not reach the position of interference. good. In addition, the operation standby timer measures the standby time for each board effect device 44, but only one operation standby timer is used, and the operation of the panel effect device 44 is waited for when the operation standby is first started. It is also possible to measure the time until the end of.

  Based on the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, the game is executed in a game machine that executes a game in which the identification information is variably displayed and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result. A movable effect device (board effect device 44) that produces an effect of the game by operating the effect member, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the movable effect device, the effect control means being movable When the operation of the effect member is started, if the operation member does not exist at the start position of the operation, the operation is not performed. Therefore, the operation of the movable effect device in which an abnormality has occurred can be prevented from being performed, and the malfunction of the gaming machine can be appropriately dealt with. It should be noted that the movable effect device that produces the game may produce an effect of a special figure fluctuation display game, or may produce an effect of a normal figure fluctuation display game. It may be a game production. In addition, for example, an effect other than that related to the variable display game, such as an effect in a waiting state for a customer, may be performed, and any effect may be performed as long as the effect is executed in the gaming machine. Further, the movable effect device is not limited to the board effect device 44 but may be a frame effect device provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15.

  Moreover, it is equipped with a light emission effect device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) that is controlled by the effect control means and can perform a light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member. Even when the operation is not performed, the light emission effect by the light emission effect device is executed as planned. Therefore, even if the effect due to the operation of the movable effect device is stopped, the decoration by the light emission is performed, and it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in decoration and a decrease in the fun of the game.

  In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and the effect control means is configured to start the operation of one movable effect member, and when the other movable effect member does not exist at a predetermined position, When the members do not interfere with each other, the operation of the one movable effect member is started, and when the members move simultaneously when the movable effect members interfere with each other, the operation of the one movable effect member is not performed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to operate the movable effect device within a range that is not affected, and it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in decorativeness and a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, based on the establishment of the start condition, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which the identification information is variably displayed and the game results in a special result, a state advantageous to the player is generated. It comprises a plurality of movable effect devices (board effect device 44) for effecting a game by operating, and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the movable effect device. When starting the operation of the movable effect member, when the other movable effect members interfere with each other when the other movable effect members do not exist at the predetermined positions and operate simultaneously, the other movable effect members are moved one by one. The start of the operation of the one movable effect member is delayed until it moves to a position where it does not interfere with the effect member. Therefore, when an abnormality has occurred in another movable effect device, the operation of one movable effect device can be put on standby, and a malfunction of the gaming machine can be appropriately handled.

  In addition, the apparatus includes a light emitting effect device (board decoration device 46 and frame decoration device 18) that is controlled by the effect control means and can perform a light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member. Even when the start of the operation of the effect member is delayed, the light emission effect by the light emission effect device is executed as planned. Therefore, even if the effect due to the operation of the movable effect device is delayed, decoration by light emission is performed, so that a significant decrease in decoration can be prevented and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  The effect control means includes time measuring means (effect control device 300) for measuring the time for delaying the start of the operation of one movable effect member, and when the time counted by the time measuring means exceeds a predetermined value. Thus, the operation of the one movable effect member is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent one movable effect device from operating at a timing greatly deviated from the scheduled timing, and not to complete the operation by the end of the special figure variation display game, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, the display device 41 is controlled by the effect control means and displays an effect related to the game. The effect control means displays a specific standby effect during a period in which the start of the operation of one movable effect member is delayed. It will be displayed on the device. Therefore, even if the effect due to the operation of the movable effect device is delayed, a separate decoration is performed, so that a significant decrease in decoration can be prevented and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  The decoration LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 perform the light emission effect at the scheduled timing regardless of the operation of the panel effect device 44. However, there was a delay in the operation start or cancellation of the operation. In this case, the start of the light emission effect may be delayed or canceled according to this. That is, it is controlled by the effect control means (effect control device 300) and includes a light emission effect device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) capable of performing a light emission effect corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member, and effect control. The means may delay the start of the light emitting effect of the light emitting effect device so as to correspond to the operation of the one movable effect member when the start of the operation of the one movable effect member is delayed. If it does in this way, the production | presentation by a movable production | presentation apparatus and the production | presentation by a light emission production | presentation apparatus can be synchronized, and the fall of the interest of a game can be prevented by preventing the fall of a decoration property.

  Further, when the delayed time exceeds a predetermined value, the operation of the one movable effect member is not performed, and the light emitting effect device (panel decoration device 46) corresponding to the operation of the movable effect member is performed. The light emitting effect of the frame decoration device 18) may not be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a single movable effect device from operating and emitting light at a timing significantly deviated from the scheduled timing, and not to complete the operation or light effect until the end of the special figure variation display game. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, the time which can wait for the operation | movement start of the board production | presentation apparatus 44 can be set according to the timing in the said special figure fluctuation display game of the said action, and the result of the said special figure fluctuation display game. For example, if there is still some time later, such as the early stage or middle stage of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is possible to omit a part of the later presentation, etc. It is possible to set the waiting time. In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a special result, even if the operation of the board effect device 44 continues until the special gaming state, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is not good. It is possible to make the waiting time longer than in the case where The same applies to the case where the start of the light emission effect in the decoration LED of the panel decoration device 46 or the frame decoration device 18 is delayed. Thereby, it can also be suggested or notified that there is a possibility of a special result.

  Further, when the operation start of the board effect device 44 is delayed, a part of the operation may be omitted, and the influence of the delay may be reduced. For example, when the operation start of the board effect device 44 is delayed, it may be returned to the initial position at the end timing originally scheduled even during the operation. Alternatively, a plurality of operation patterns having different operation times may be prepared, and an operation pattern that reduces deviation from the originally scheduled end timing according to the standby time may be selected.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 120, when the board production device 44 is not in the initial position at the scheduled operation timing, the subsequent operation of the board production device 44 is not performed. If it returns to the initial position at the timing, the operation may be performed.

  Next, the sub information display device 90 will be described. As shown in FIG. 124 (a), the sub information display device 90 is a single sub game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A single sub-game display unit for displaying the first sub-game display unit 91 composed of the light-emitting unit L5 and the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special-figure variation display game corresponding to the second special-figure variation display game. And a second sub game display unit 92 composed of the light emitting unit L6. Furthermore, a first sub display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories that is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units L1 and L2, and the second special display unit by the two light emitting units L3 and L4. And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories which are the right to execute the figure variation display game. In FIG. 124 (a), the symbols L1 to L6 are displayed on the light emitting units for explanation, but may or may not be actually displayed.

  FIG. 124 (b) shows a display mode in the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94. Each display unit is configured to display the number of holdings by two light emitting units, both of which are turned off when the holding number is 0, one is turned off and the other is turned on when the holding number is 1, and both are turned on when the holding number is 2, In the hold number 3, one is lit and the other blinks, and in the hold number 4, both are blinked.

  Such a display mode is shown in FIG. 124 (c) by selecting the special figure 1 and special figure 2 sub-holding number display tables 1 and 2 according to the value of bit 2 of the sub flashing display timer area every about 133 ms. This is realized by alternately selecting a table and setting the corresponding display mode with reference to the current number of holds in the selected table.

  The sub flashing display timer of this embodiment is updated by +1 in the decoration control process (step C18) performed at every frame switching timing (1/30 seconds) using the 8-bit sub flashing display timer area provided in the RAM 322 or the like. Consists of. Then, it is determined whether the output of bit 2 in the sub blinking display timer area is the on timing (1) or not, and the sub pending number display table is selected. Since the value of bit 2 is switched between 0 and 1 every about 133 ms, it is possible to control the turning off and on in units of about 133 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control the turning off and lighting in units of shorter time or longer time with reference to other bits.

  FIG. 124 (c) shows the contents of the sub-holding number display tables 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. 124 (b), the display mode corresponding to the number of holdings is the same in each display unit, and the contents of the sub-holding number display table are also the same. Special figure 1 sub-hold display tables 1 and 2 control the display mode of L1 and L2, and special figure 2 sub-hold display tables 1 and 2 control the display mode of L3 and L4.

  For example, when the number of holds is 1, L1 and L3 are turned off when both the sub hold display tables 1 and 2 are turned off, and both L2 and L4 are turned on in the sub hold display tables 1 and 2. It becomes a lighting state by being selected. When the number of holdings is 3, L1 and L3 are turned on by selecting lighting in the sub-holding display tables 1 and 2. As for L2 and L4, lighting is selected in the hold display table 1 and light-off is selected in the sub-hold display table 2, so that the light is turned on and off approximately every 133 ms.

  That is, in the blinking state, if the value of the sub blinking display timer is a predetermined extinction range (here, bit 2 is 0), it is extinguished, and other than the extinction range (here, bit 2 is 1) If so, turn it on. Further, the extinguishing range when the display state of at least the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 is blinking is a common range.

  Further, the sub flashing display timer is constantly updated, and even if the number of holdings is changed, the sub flashing display timer is not reset or another value is set. Therefore, when shifting to the blinking state, the light-emitting state is turned on or off depending on the value of the sub-blinking display timer after the number of hold changes. For example, L1 and L3 when changing from the hold number 3 to the hold number 4 change from the lighting state to the flashing state, but the value of the sub flashing display timer at the time of change is a value (bits) for selecting the sub hold display table 1 If 2 is 1), the lighting is continued, and if the value for selecting the sub-hold display table 2 (bit 2 is 0), the lighting is immediately turned off.

  In addition, when the number of hold changes and shifts from the blinking state to the lighting state, the value of the sub blink display timer after the change of the hold number is a value for selecting the sub hold display table 1 (bit 2 is 1). If it is present, the lighting is continued, and if the value for selecting the sub-hold display table 2 (bit 2 is 0), the lighting is immediately changed from lighting to lighting. That is, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emission state is different from the light emission state to be shifted, the light emission state is immediately changed. Here, there is no case of transition from the blinking state to the unlit state. However, when there is such a transition, if the current light emitting state is turned off as described above, the light emitting state is maintained and the current light emitting state is changed. If it is lit, it is immediately changed to off.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, during the variation display of the corresponding special figure variation display game, the light emitting unit L5 or L6 is blinked to indicate that the variation display is being performed. The display during the variable display is realized by switching on and off every about 133 ms in accordance with the value of bit 2 in the sub flashing display timer area as shown in FIG. 124 (d). The period of turning on and off in the blinking display is synchronized with the period of turning on and off in the blinking display on the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94.

  In addition, the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 display the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result when the corresponding special figure variation display game is finished. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (e), when it is out of position, it is turned off, and when it is big hit or small hit, it is turned on. Note that the display mode in the case of the small hit may be different from the display mode different from the big hit. For example, you may make it blink in the aspect different from the blink in the fluctuation | variation. Further, the display of the previous result is maintained in the sub game display unit that is not executing the corresponding special figure variation display game.

  By controlling the light emission mode in this way, the blinking timing is synchronized in the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94, The visibility and decoration of the display are improved. In addition, the blinking control of a plurality of light emitting units can be performed by one sub blinking display timer, and the control burden can be reduced. That is, the effect control device 300 controls the sub information display device 90 and forms a sub blinking display timer for controlling the period during which the light is extinguished and the period during which it is lit in the blinking state.

[Sub information display device control processing]
FIG. 125 shows the sub information display device control process performed in the decoration control process (step C18) in the main process (see FIG. 120). In this sub information display device control process, first, the sub flashing display timer is updated by +1 (step C701), and it is determined whether or not the output of a specific bit in the sub flashing display timer area is on (1). (Step C702). As described above, the sub flashing display timer of the present embodiment is configured by updating +1 by the decoration control processing performed every 1/30 seconds using the 8-bit sub flashing display timer area, It is determined whether the output of bit 2 is on timing (1). Since the value of bit 2 is switched between 0 and 1 every about 133 ms, it is possible to control the turning off and on in units of about 133 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control the turning off and lighting in units of shorter time or longer time with reference to other bits.

  When it is the output on timing (step C702; Y), the special figure 1 sub hold number display in the special figure 1 sub hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the first sub display unit 93 is defined. Table 1 is set (step C703), and if it is not the output on timing (step C702; N), the special figure 1 sub-hold number display table 2 is set (step C704). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 sub-display hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 sub-hold number display table and saved in the segment area corresponding to the first sub-display unit 93 (step C705). Note that the special figure 1 sub-display hold number is set in the special figure 1 hold information setting process (see FIG. 112), and here, a value always consistent with the actual number of first start memories is used. It is set up.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output on timing (step C706). If it is the output on timing (step C706; Y), the special figure 2 sub-hold in which the display mode on the second sub-display unit 94 is defined. Of the number display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 sub-hold number display table 1 is set (step C707), and when the output on-time is not reached (step C706; N), the special figure 2 sub-hold number display table 2 is set. Set (step C708). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 sub display hold number is acquired from the set special figure 2 sub hold number display table, and saved in the segment area corresponding to the second sub display unit 94 (step C709). Note that the special figure 2 sub-display hold number is set in the special figure 2 hold information setting process (see FIG. 113), and here, a value always consistent with the actual number of second start memories is used. It is set up.

  Next, it is determined whether the sub variation display timer is 0 (step C710). The sub variation display timer manages the variation time of the special variation display game corresponding to the special variation display game, and the initial time corresponding to the variation time of the special variation display game at the start of the special variation display game. Value is set.

  If this sub variation display timer is 0 (step C710; Y), that is, if it is not during the variation time, the sub information display device control process is terminated. If the sub variation display timer is not 0 (step C710; N), that is, if it is in the variation time, the sub variation display timer is updated by -1, and it is determined whether the time is up, that is, the value is 0. (Step C712).

  When time is up (step C712; Y), a result display table (see FIG. 124 (e)) is set (step C713), display data corresponding to the result is acquired and saved in the corresponding segment area (step C713). C714), the sub information display device control process is terminated. Thereby, the result mode corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed.

  If the time is not up (step C712; N), it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step C715). If it is the output on timing (step C715; Y), the light emitting unit of the display unit corresponding to the special figure changing display game being executed out of the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is displayed. Lighting is set (step C716), and the sub information display device control process is terminated. If the output on-time is not reached (step C715; N), the light-emitting section of the display section corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed is turned off from the first sub-game display section 91 and the second sub-game display section 92. Is set (step C717), and the sub information display device control process is terminated. As a result, during the variable display, the light emitting section of the display section corresponding to the special figure variable display game being executed in the first sub game display section 91 and the second sub game display section 92 is in a blinking state. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display device 90.

  Based on the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and the game results in a special result, the game machine generates a state advantageous to the player. Is controlled by a game control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the effect based on information from the game control means, and a game control means. An information display device (collective display device 50) that displays information about the game, and a sub information display device 90 that is controlled by the effect control means and displays information about the game with the light emitter, and the game control means is in an extinguished state. It is configured to display information on the game on the information display device by controlling the light emitter in either or both of the lighting state and the blinking state, and blinking In the state, a blinking display timer (game control device 100) for controlling the period for turning off and the period for turning on is provided, and when the blinking state is set, the blinking display timer is turned off if the value of the blinking display timer is within a predetermined turn-off range. The flashing display timer is constantly updated regardless of whether or not it is in a blinking state, and is started when the blinking state is started. Start from the light emission state according to the value of the blinking display timer at the time, and when the flashing state ends, if the current light emission state and the light emission state to be shifted are different, the light emission state is changed immediately. It will be like that. Therefore, processing such as setting a timer value or resetting the timer value at the time of transition to the blinking state or transition from the blinking state becomes unnecessary, and the control burden can be reduced. Further, by providing the sub information display device 90, it is possible to more reliably notify the player of information related to the game.

  In addition, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) controls the light-emitting body in any one of the light-off state, the light-on state, or both, and the blinking state, so that information related to the game is sub-information. The display device 90 is configured to display, and includes a sub-blinking display timer (effect control device 300) for controlling a period of turning off and a period of lighting in the blinking state. It is configured to control so that the display timer is turned off when the value is within a predetermined turn-off range, and is turned on when the value is outside the predetermined turn-off range. When the blinking state is started constantly, the light emission state corresponding to the value of the sub blinking display timer at the start is started, and when the blinking state ends, the current light emission state is shifted to. Departure If the state is different becomes immediately it has to change the light emission state. Therefore, processing such as setting a timer value or resetting the timer value at the time of transition to the blinking state or transition from the blinking state becomes unnecessary, and the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, an inflow area (start winning prize port 36, a normal variable prize winning device 37, a normal start gate 34) that can detect the inflow of game balls, and a start memory that becomes a game execution right based on detection of game balls in the inflow area. Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, and game execution means (game control device 100) for executing a game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. The area includes a first inflow area and a second inflow area, and the start memory means stores the first start memory as the start memory based on the detection of the game ball in the first inflow area, and the second inflow A second start memory is stored as the start memory based on the detection of the game ball in the area, and the game execution means executes the first game based on the first start memory, and the second start memory based on the second start memory. To run 2 games The production control means (production control device 300) displays the first start memory number on the first sub display section 93 of the sub information display device 90, and the second start memory number on the sub information display device. 90, the game is displayed on the sub game display units 91 and 92 of the sub information display device 90 using at least the blinking state, and the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 are displayed. In addition, the sub game display units 91 and 92 use a common sub flashing display timer to control the flashing state. Therefore, processing such as setting a timer value or resetting the timer value at the time of transition to the blinking state or transition from the blinking state becomes unnecessary, and the control burden can be reduced.

  Further, the production control means (production control device 300) is configured to make the predetermined turn-off range a common range in the first sub display section 93, the second sub display section 94, and the sub game display sections 91 and 92. Become. Therefore, the blinking state can be synchronized with the plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and visibility are improved.

  The first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 are each displayed by a single light emitting unit, but may be displayed by a plurality of light emitting units. For example, two light emitting units are provided and blinking so as to light alternately during variable display. Further, as a display of the result mode, only one side may be turned on in the case of losing, and only the other side may be turned on in the case of winning. Of course, the display may be performed by three or more light emitting units. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sub game display unit is divided into the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92. You may make it display the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to a 2nd special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, in the game control device 100, a blinking display timer for controlling the blinking state in the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 and the general figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50, and effect control In apparatus 300, a sub flashing display timer for controlling the flashing state of first sub game display unit 91, second sub game display unit 92, first sub display unit 93, and second sub display unit 94 is synchronized. Also good.

  That is, the update cycle of the blinking display timer and the sub blinking display timer are made the same, and the same initial value is set at a predetermined timing so that the values are always the same. In this way, if the bit to be referred to and the range to be turned off are the same, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the general figure hold indicator 56, the first sub game display section 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94 can be synchronized in the blinking state in any light emitting unit, and the decorativeness and visibility are improved. Further, even if the bit to be referred to and the range to be turned off are not the same, it is possible to blink with a predetermined periodicity, and this also improves the decorativeness and visibility.

  In the above description, the same sub flashing display timer is used in the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94, and the flashing state is turned off. All the units are synchronized by setting the period to be the same. However, a separate sub-flashing timer may be used for some or all of these display units, or the flashing-off periods are different. You may not make it.

  Further, in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, the light emission mode according to the result is immediately shifted with the end of the variation time displayed in the blinking state. When the state and the light emission state according to the result are different, the current light emission state may be maintained until the light emission state coincides with the light emission state according to the result. For example, when the light emission state immediately before the transition is ON but the result is out of order and it is necessary to shift to OFF, the value of the bit referred to in the sub flashing display timer area (bit 2 in this case) changes to indicate the lighting period. The lighting is maintained until the process is completed, and thereafter, the light is turned off corresponding to the result of the deviation. By doing so, the light emission state changes in synchronization with the blinking display on the first sub display section 93 and the second sub display section 94 when the variable display ends, and the decorativeness and visibility are improved. .

  Furthermore, even when the variable display is started, if the light emission state corresponding to the previous result currently displayed is different from the light emission state according to the value of the sub flashing display timer area, the two light emission states are matched. The start of the variable display may be delayed. For example, if the light emission state corresponding to the previous result currently being displayed is extinguished corresponding to the deviation, and the light emission state is turned on according to the value of the blinking display timer area when transitioning to the blinking state, the blinking display timer The flashing state is not changed until the start of the light-off period in which the light emission state is turned off according to the value of the area. By doing so, the light emission state changes in synchronization with the blinking display on the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 at the start of the variable display, and the decorativeness and visibility are improved. .

  The control to synchronize the blinking state at the start and end of the variable display is performed in the collective display device 50 by the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, the general figure display 53, and the special display. Applicable to the case where the display is controlled by using a common blinking display timer in order to control the blinking state in FIG. 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and universal figure hold indicator 56. It is.

  In addition, the time of the variable display in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is managed by the sub variable display timer, but at the end of the variable display of the special figure variable display game, the game control device When a stop command is transmitted from 100 to the effect control device 300, the variable display may be stopped upon receipt of this stop command. Even when the stop command is received in this way, the sub-change display timer may be used to manage the change time in parallel. In this case, the stop command reception and the sub-change display timer time The variable display may be stopped at the earlier of up.

  In addition, as described above, in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, when the light emission state just before the transition and the light emission state according to the result are different, the light emission state according to the result is The current light emission state may be maintained until a matching light emission state is reached, but such control is performed only when the variable display is ended based on the time-out of the sub-variable display timer, and is stopped. When the variable display is ended by receiving the command, the light emission state corresponding to the result may be immediately set regardless of the current light emission state. Of course, when the variable display is terminated by receiving the stop command, the current light emission state may be maintained until the light emission state matches the light emission state according to the result, or the sub-variable display timer has timed out. In particular, the light emission state corresponding to the result may be immediately set only when the variable display is terminated.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification temporarily waits for the update of the hold indicator on the collective display device 50.

[Segment LED editing processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the segment LED editing process shown in FIG. 126 is performed instead of the segment LED editing process shown in FIG. In this segment LED editing process, after setting one of the usual map hold number display tables 1 and 2 (steps S503 and S504), a display delay process is performed for waiting for a change in display for a predetermined time (step S901). Display data corresponding to the number of reserved general-purpose displays is acquired from the set number of reserved general-purpose displays and saved in the segment area of the general-purpose reserved display (step S902). The general map display hold number is a value of the hold number displayed on the general map hold display 56, and the period of waiting for the update may be different from the actual hold number.

  In addition, after setting one of the special figure 1 hold number display tables 1 and 2 (steps S507 and S508), display delay processing is performed to wait for a change in display for a certain period of time (step S903), and the set special figure is set. Display data corresponding to the special figure 1 display hold number is acquired from the 1 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display (step S904). The special figure 1 display hold number is a value of the hold number displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, and the period of waiting for the update may be different from the actual hold number.

  In addition, after setting one of the special figure 2 hold number display tables 1 and 2 (steps S511 and S512), display delay processing is performed to wait for a change in display for a certain period of time (step S905). The display data corresponding to the special figure 2 display hold number is acquired from the 2 hold number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display (step S906). The special figure 2 display hold number is a value of the hold number displayed on the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, and the period of waiting for the update may be different from the actual hold number.

[Display delay processing]
FIG. 127 shows display delay processing (steps S901, S903, and S905) in the segment LED editing processing described above. In this display delay process, first, the number of the corresponding previous hold and the actual hold number that is the actual hold number are compared (step S531). The corresponding hold is a hold currently being processed. For example, in the case of a display delay process (step C901) for the number of hold on the map, the map hold is the corresponding hold. Further, the pre-holding is the number of holdings when the actual holding number is displayed after the display standby period has elapsed, as set in step C540 described later.

  If the previous hold count and the actual hold count do not match (step S532; N), it is determined whether there is a corresponding hold flag (step S533). The standby flag is a flag that is set during a period of waiting for the display of the actual pending number. A special figure standby flag, special figure 1 standby flag, and special figure 2 standby flag are prepared for each of the special figure hold indicator, special figure 1 hold indicator, and special figure 2 hold indicator. The flag corresponding to the hold indicator that is being set is set. For example, when waiting for the display of the actual pending number of the usual figure holding number, the usual figure waiting flag is set.

  If there is no corresponding pending standby flag, the corresponding pending standby flag is saved (step S534), and the initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the corresponding pending display waiting timer (step S535). Thereafter, the previous hold number is set to the display hold number (step S538), and the display delay process is terminated. As a result, the previous hold number is displayed on the corresponding hold indicator.

  On the other hand, if the number of previous holds matches the number of actual holds (step S532; Y), or if there is a corresponding hold flag (step S533; Y), the corresponding hold display wait timer must be zero. -1 is updated (step S536), and it is determined whether the corresponding pending display standby timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step S537).

  If the corresponding hold display standby timer is not 0 (step S537; N), the previous hold number is set to the display hold number (step S538), and the display delay process is terminated. If the corresponding hold display standby timer is 0 (step S537; Y), the actual hold number is set to the display hold number (step S539). Then, the actual pending number is set as the new previous pending number (step S540), the corresponding pending standby flag is cleared (step S541), and the display delay process is terminated.

  By this display standby processing, even if the start memory number changes, the start memory number displayed on the hold indicator of the collective display device 50 does not change for a certain period, and the display of the start memory number is frequently updated. This prevents the player from having difficulty grasping the display.

  FIG. 128 shows the display on the hold indicators 54 and 55 of the collective display device 50, the storage display section 83 of the display device 41, the number of start memories when the increase or decrease of the start memory occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined time. An example of display on the display unit 86 is shown. Here, the case where one second start memory is generated after one second start memory is digested as a change in the number of start memories multiple times is shown.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), first, the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 3 (t41). The display 55 and the second memory display unit 83b and the second startup memory number display unit 86b of the display device 41 both indicate that the second startup memory number is 3. In addition, in the 1st holding | maintenance indicator 54 of the collective display apparatus 50, the 1st memory | storage display part 83a of the display apparatus 41, and the 1st start memory number display part 86a, it is displayed that the 1st start memory number is 4, In this example, since there is no change in the first start memory number, the description is omitted, but the same display control as the second hold display device 55, the second memory display portion 83b, and the second start memory number display portion 86b described below. It has become.

  After that, when the special start variation display game based on the second start memory is started and the second start memory is consumed and the second start memory number is changed to 2 (t42), the second memory display portion 83b of the display device 41, In the second start memory number display portion 86b, display according to the change of the start memory number is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the second hold display device 55 of the collective display device 50, the display update is delayed by the display delay processing (S510) of the segment LED editing processing (see FIG. 86). Therefore, even if there is a change in the starting memory number, the display according to this change is not made immediately, and the display before the change is maintained over the standby period. When the standby period has elapsed, the start memory number at that time is displayed (t43). Here, the second start memory number is displayed as two.

  Similarly, when the second start memory is generated and the second start memory number is changed to 3 (t44), the second memory display portion 83b and the second start memory number display portion 86b of the display device 41 are immediately activated. Display is performed in accordance with the change in the starting memory number. On the other hand, in the second hold display device 55 of the collective display device 50, even if there is a change in the number of starting memories, the display before the change is maintained over the standby period without immediately changing the display corresponding thereto. The

  FIG. 128 (b) shows an example in which there is a change in the number of starting memories again during the standby period. That is, the second start memory generation (t44) in FIG. 128 (a) occurs during the standby period. Also in this case, the second memory display unit 83b and the second startup memory number display unit 86b of the display device 41 immediately display according to the change in the startup memory number. On the other hand, in the second hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, the display indicating 3 which is the display before the change of the start memory number is maintained because it is in the standby period, and the new second start The display does not change even if memory is generated.

  When the waiting period has elapsed, the start memory number at that time is displayed (t43), and here the second start memory number is three. That is, even if there is an increase or decrease in the second start memory, the state where the second start memory number is 3 remains displayed. Note that even if there is a change in the startup memory during the standby period, a new standby period is not set, so that the actual startup memory number is not displayed over a long period of time. .

  FIG. 129 shows a display mode in the example of FIG. 128 (b). As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and (f), the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory is started from the state where the second start memory number is shown to be 3 (t41 in FIG. 128). When the second start memory is started and the second start memory number is changed to 2 (t42 in FIG. 128), as shown in FIGS. 129 (b) and (c), the second memory display on the display device 41 is displayed. In the part 83b and the second start memory number display part 86b, display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory number is immediately performed. Thereafter, when the second start memory is generated and the second start memory number is changed to 3 (t44 in FIG. 128), as shown in FIGS. 129 (d) and (e), the second memory display unit of the display device 41 is displayed. In 83b, the second start memory number display portion 86b immediately displays according to the increase in the start memory number.

  On the other hand, in the second hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, even if there is a change in the starting memory number as shown in FIGS. 129 (f) to (h), the change as shown in FIG. 129 (i). The display before the change is maintained over the standby period without immediately changing the display in accordance with. Here, after the second start memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the standby period, and the second start memory number remains on the display to indicate 3. In FIGS. 129 (f) to (h), the lighting state is shaded and the blinking state is shaded.

  When the number of starting memories changes a plurality of times in a short time such as a standby period, the decoration display shown in FIGS. 129 (b) and (d) is omitted, and only the display or deletion of the decoration special figure starting storage display is performed. May be performed. In addition, regardless of the standby period, as shown in FIGS. 129 (b) and (d), when a further change in the start memory occurs during the decorative display accompanying the change in the start memory, it is being executed. The decoration display may be stopped and the decoration display associated with a new start-up memory change may be performed.

  In addition, the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed on the display device 41, but it may be displayed on a second display device different from the display device 41. The second display device may be a liquid crystal display device or a display device constituted by LEDs. Although the display of the first start memory and the second start memory has been described here, the general start memory is displayed on the display device 41 or displayed on the second display device. The control may be performed in the same manner as described above.

  From the above, the variation display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area (the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general start gate 34), and the result of the variation display game is the special result. In a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player when it becomes, a game control means (game control device 100) that controls the game comprehensively, and a variation display based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning area Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as a game execution right together with a random number up to a predetermined upper limit number, and information of the start memory controlled by the game control means and stored in the start memory means The start memory display means (collective display device 50) to display, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the effect control means. A display device 41 for displaying a game effect, and the effect control means can display the start memory information stored in the start memory means on the display device 41 as a start memory display, and within a predetermined period. Even when the number of starting memories changes more than once, the change process within the predetermined period is displayed without omission, and the game control means has changed the number of starting memories more than once within the predetermined period. In this case, the change process within the predetermined period is omitted and displayed on the start memory display means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information on the startup memory.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, and the description is omitted, and mainly different portions. explain. The gaming machine according to the present modification temporarily waits for the update of the decoration special figure start memory display on the display device 41.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Information Setting Processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, a special figure 1 hold information setting process shown in FIG. 130 is performed instead of the special figure 1 hold information setting process shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 hold information setting process, when the new hold number and the previous hold number are not the same (step C503; N), it is determined whether or not the decoration special figure start storage display is waiting to be updated (step C651).

  When the decoration special figure start memory display is not waiting to be updated (step C651; N), an initial value (for example, 128 ms) is saved in the update waiting timer (step C652), and the processes after step C504 are performed. With this process, the decoration display (animation) in the decoration special figure start memory display accompanying the increase or decrease in the number of holds is set. In this case, the decoration special figure start storage display of the decoration special figure start storage display is performed after a predetermined update waiting time elapses. A display is set for increasing or decreasing and starting the decorative display.

  On the other hand, when the decoration special figure start memory display is waiting for update (step C651; Y), the index of the continuous change motion control table corresponding to the new number of pending is calculated and saved (step C653), and the update is waited for. The timer is cleared (step C654), and the processing after step C525 is performed. By this process, the increase or decrease of the decoration special figure start memory display and the decoration display (animation) in accordance with the increase or decrease of the start memory number are set. Cancel the displayed display and set the display for continuous change.

  The display for continuous change is a content that collectively displays the change in the previous start memory number and the current start memory number. If the previous change in the starting memory number and the current change in the starting memory number are an increase and a decrease in the starting memory number, an increase is displayed after a display that decreases regardless of the order of increase and decrease. It has become.

[Special Figure 2 Hold Information Setting Process]
Further, instead of the special figure 2 hold information setting process shown in FIG. 113, a special figure 2 hold information setting process shown in FIG. 131 is performed. In this special figure 2 hold information setting process, similarly to the above-described special figure 1 hold information setting process, the processes of steps C651 to C654 are performed.

  FIG. 132 shows an example of the update of the decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 132 (a), a new second start memory is generated with three second start memories. As a result, a display for increasing the decorative special figure start memory display and a decorative display associated therewith are set. This display is a display in which the update of the special special figure start memory display is started after a predetermined update waiting time has elapsed. Yes, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the display does not change in the second memory display portion 83b or the second start memory number display portion 86b during the update waiting time.

  Thereafter, when the second start memory is consumed during the update waiting time, the display set when the update is being waited for is canceled and the display for continuous change is set. In this case, the second start memory is decreased after the increase, but in the display for continuous change, as shown in FIGS. 132 (c) and 132 (d), the display for decreasing the start memory is performed first, and then FIG. As shown in (e) and (f), a series of displays is performed to display the start-up memory increasing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), a new second start memory is generated in a state where there are three second start memories, and the update wait time is reached as shown in FIG. 132 (g). If there is no change in the number of starting memories during this update waiting time, only the display for increasing the second starting memory is performed as shown in FIGS. 132 (h) and (i). This display is a display set when the second start memory is generated.

  From the above, when the start memory increases or decreases within a predetermined period, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs a display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory regardless of the order of change. After that, the display corresponding to the increase in the starting memory is performed.

  Even when the start memory increases again during the update waiting time after the start memory number increases, the display set when the update is waiting is canceled and the display for continuous change is set. In this case, display corresponding to the increase in the start memory for two times is performed. In addition, although the display for continuous change is the content for executing the normal display continuously, it may be emphasized that there has been a continuous change as different from the normal display.

  Further, the decoration display may be omitted when there is a continuous change. For example, the display of FIGS. 132 (b) and (e) may be omitted, and the decorative special figure start memory display may be simply displayed or deleted. In other words, when the start memory display is changed as the start memory increases or decreases, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is configured to perform a decoration display that decorates the change, for a predetermined period. If the number of start memories changes a plurality of times, the display of the decoration display within the predetermined period is omitted.

  Moreover, you may combine with the above-mentioned 1st modification. In this case, the waiting time for temporarily waiting for the update of the hold indicator on the collective display device 50 and the updating waiting time for temporarily waiting for the update of the start memory number display unit 86 on the display device 41 are set as the same time. It's also good, or a different time.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine according to the present modification temporarily waits for an update on the sub information display device 90.

  In FIG. 133, when the increase or decrease in the start memory occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined time, the display unit 41 displays the start memory number on the display device 41, the display on the start memory number display unit 86, and the sub information An example of the display of the sub display unit that displays the start memory number on the display device 90 has been shown. Here, the case where one second start memory is generated after one second start memory is digested as a change in the number of start memories multiple times is shown.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 133 (a), first, the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 3 (t81). In the part 83b, the second start memory number display part 86b, and the second sub display part 94 of the sub information display device 90, it is displayed that the second start memory number is 3. In the first storage display unit 83a, the first startup storage number display unit 86a of the display device 41, and the first sub display unit 93 of the sub information display device 90, it is displayed that the first startup storage number is 4. In this example, there is no change in the first start memory number, so the description is omitted. However, the second memory display portion 83b, the second start memory number display portion 86b, and the sub information display device 90 of the display device 41 described below will be described. The display control is the same as that of the second sub display unit 94.

  After that, when the special start variation display game based on the second start memory is started and the second start memory is consumed and the second start memory number is changed to 2 (t82), the second memory display portion 83b of the display device 41, In the second start memory number display portion 86b, display according to the change of the start memory number is immediately performed. On the other hand, the display update is delayed in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90. Therefore, even if there is a change in the starting memory number, the display according to this change is not made immediately, and the display before the change is maintained over the standby period. When the standby period elapses, the start memory number at that time is displayed (t83). Here, the second start memory number is displayed as two.

  Similarly, when the second start memory is generated and the second start memory number is changed to 3 (t84), the second memory display portion 83b and the second start memory number display portion 86b of the display device 41 are immediately activated. Display is performed in accordance with the change in the starting memory number. On the other hand, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, even if there is a change in the starting memory number, the display before the change is maintained over the standby period without immediately changing the display corresponding thereto. Is done.

  FIG. 133 (b) shows an example in which there is a change in the number of starting memories again during the standby period. That is, the second start memory generation (t84) in FIG. 133 (a) occurs during the standby period. Also in this case, the second memory display unit 83b and the second startup memory number display unit 86b of the display device 41 immediately display according to the change in the startup memory number. On the other hand, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, the display indicating 3 which is the display before the change of the start memory number is maintained because it is in the standby period, and a new second The display does not change even if start-up memory occurs.

  When the standby period elapses, the start memory number at that time is displayed (t83). Here, the second start memory number is three. That is, even if there is an increase or decrease in the second start memory, the state where the second start memory number is 3 remains displayed. Note that even if there is a change in the startup memory during the standby period, a new standby period is not set, so that the actual startup memory number is not displayed over a long period of time. .

  FIG. 134 shows a display mode in the example of FIG. 133 (b). As shown in FIGS. 134 (a) and (f), from the state where the second start memory number is shown to be 3 (t81 in FIG. 133), the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory is started. When the second start memory is started and the second start memory number is changed to 2 (t82 in FIG. 133), as shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 134 (c), the second memory display on the display device 41 is displayed. In the part 83b and the second start memory number display part 86b, display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory number is immediately performed. Thereafter, when the second start memory is generated and the second start memory number is changed to 3 (t84 in FIG. 133), as shown in FIGS. 134 (d) and 134 (e), the second memory display unit of the display device 41 is displayed. In 83b, the second start memory number display portion 86b immediately displays according to the increase in the start memory number.

  On the other hand, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, even if there is a change in the starting memory number as shown in FIGS. 134 (f) to (h), as shown in FIG. 134 (i). The display before the change is maintained over the standby period without immediately changing the display according to the change. Here, after the second start memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the standby period, and the second start memory number remains on the display to indicate 3. In FIGS. 134 (f) to (h), the lighting state is indicated by shading, and the blinking state is indicated by hatching.

  When the number of start memories changes a plurality of times in a short time such as a standby period, the decoration display shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and (d) is omitted, and only the display or deletion of the decoration special figure start storage display is performed. May be performed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 134 (d), if a change in the start memory occurs while the decoration display accompanying the change in the start memory is being performed, regardless of the standby period, it is being executed. The decoration display may be stopped and the decoration display associated with a new start-up memory change may be performed.

  In order to perform such control, display delay processing is performed immediately before step C705 and immediately before step C709 in the sub information display device control processing shown in FIG. This display delay process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 127, and setting of the standby time and the display hold count for the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 in the effect control device 300 are performed. Assumed to be performed.

  In addition, you may combine the structure of the above-mentioned 1st modification. In this case, even if the standby time for temporarily waiting for the update of the hold display device in the batch display device 50 and the standby time for temporarily waiting for the update of the start memory number in the sub information display device 90 are the same time. Good or different time

  Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area (start winning prize port 36, normal variable winning device 37, ordinary start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. In the case of a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player, a game control means (game control device 100) for overall control of the game, and a variable display game based on detection of a game ball in the starting area Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as an execution right together with a random number up to a predetermined upper limit number, and information of the start memory controlled by the game control means and stored in the start memory means are displayed. Control is performed by the start memory display means (batch display device 50), the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the effect control means, A display device 41 for displaying the effect of the technique, and a sub-information display device 90 that is controlled by the effect control means and displays information about the game by the light emitter, and the effect control means is a start stored in the start storage means The stored information can be displayed on the display device 41 as a start memory display, and can be displayed using the light emitter of the sub information display device 90, and the number of start memories has changed more than once within a predetermined period. In addition, the display device 41 displays the change process within the predetermined period without omitting it, and the sub information display device 90 displays the change process within the predetermined period without displaying the change process. In the case where the number of start memories changes a plurality of times, the change process within the predetermined period is omitted and displayed on the start memory display means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information on the startup memory.

  Moreover, you may combine the structure of the above-mentioned 2nd modification. In this case, as shown in FIG. 132, during the update standby time, the display of the storage display unit 83 and the start storage number display unit 86 is waited for update. A configuration for performing a series of displays for increasing display may be applied as it is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 135, the storage display unit 83 does not wait for the display update, but immediately updates the display according to the change in the start memory number, and the start memory number display unit 86 waits for the display update. Anyway. That is, if it respond | corresponds to each of FIG. 133 (a), (b), the 2nd sub display part 94 and the 2nd starting memory | storage display part 86b will perform a change like the upper stage, and the 2nd memory | storage display part 83 will be displayed. You may make it change immediately like a lower stage. The example shown in FIG. 135 is an example in which one second start memory is generated during the standby period after one second start memory is exhausted as a change in the number of start memories multiple times, as in FIG. 53 (b). is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and (f), the special start variation display game based on the second start memory is started from the state where the second start memory number is shown to be the second start. When the memory is digested and the second start memory number is changed to 2, as shown in FIGS. 135 (b) and 135 (c), the second memory display unit 83b of the display device 41 immediately responds to the decrease in the start memory number. Displayed. Thereafter, when the second start memory is generated and the second start memory number is changed to 3, as shown in FIGS. 135 (d) and 135 (e), the second memory display unit 83b of the display device 41 immediately starts the memory. Display according to the increase in the number.

  On the other hand, in the second start memory number display portion 86b of the display device 41, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (e), even if the start memory number changes, the display change corresponding to the change is immediately made. Without being performed, the display before the change is maintained over the waiting period. Here, after the second start memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the standby period, and the second start memory number remains on the display to indicate 3. Further, in the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90, even if there is a change in the starting memory number as shown in FIGS. 135 (f) to (h), the change is as shown in FIG. 134 (i). The display before the change is maintained over the standby period without immediately changing the corresponding display. Here, after the second start memory number decreases to 2, it increases to 3 during the standby period, and the second start memory number remains on the display to indicate 3. In FIGS. 135 (f) to (h), the lighting state is indicated by shading and the blinking state is indicated by diagonal lines.

  When such display is performed, in step C504 of FIG. 130 or step C524 of FIG. 131, the display of the memory display unit 83 immediately increases or decreases the decoration special figure start memory display and starts the decoration display. The display of the start memory number display section 86 is set so that the start memory number display is increased or decreased and the decoration display is started after a predetermined update waiting time has elapsed.

  Further, in step C653 of FIGS. 130 and 131, for the display of the storage display unit 83, a display for immediately increasing or decreasing the decoration special figure start storage display and starting the decoration display is set, and the start memory number display unit As for the display of 86, the display set in steps C504 and C524 is canceled and the display for continuous change is set when the update is not waiting. As a display for continuous change in this case, when the start memory number returns to the value at the start of the update standby (when the increase and decrease occur the same number of times), the start memory number display is updated and decorated. It is assumed that no display is set or the display set in steps C504 and C524 is simply canceled. That is, the current display is maintained without change. Further, when the start memory number is different from the value at the start of the update standby (for example, when start memory is continuously generated), an update display or a decoration display for changing the start memory number display to the current start memory number is displayed. Set the display to include.

  In contrast to the example in FIG. 135, the start memory number display unit 86 does not wait for the display update and immediately updates the display according to the change in the start memory number, and the storage display unit 83 updates the display. You may make it wait. That is, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50, the first storage display portion 83a, the second storage display portion 83b of the display device 41, the sub information. If the first start memory number display unit 86a, the second start memory number display unit 86b of the display device 90, and the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90 are provided with a display unit for displaying the number of reserved drawings, those display units It is possible to arbitrarily set whether to change the display immediately when there is a change in the starting memory number or to wait for the display to change over the waiting period even if there is a change in the starting memory number. is there.

  Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area (start winning prize port 36, normal variable winning device 37, ordinary start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result. In the case of a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player, a game control means (game control device 100) for overall control of the game, and a variable display game based on detection of a game ball in the starting area Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as an execution right together with a random number up to a predetermined upper limit number, and information of the start memory controlled by the game control means and stored in the start memory means are displayed. Control is performed by the start memory display means (batch display device 50), the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the effect control means, A display device 41 for displaying the effect of the technique, and a sub-information display device 90 that is controlled by the effect control means and displays information about the game by the light emitter, and the effect control means is a start stored in the start storage means The stored information can be displayed on the display device 41 as a start storage display, and can be displayed using the light emitter of the sub information display device 90. The start storage display includes a first display (storage display unit 83) and There is a second display (starting memory number display part 86), each of which is configured to independently display information of the starting memory having the same contents, and the number of starting memories has changed a plurality of times within a predetermined period In this case, the first display is displayed without omitting the change process within the predetermined period, and the second display and sub information display device 90 is displayed with the change process within the predetermined period omitted. Means within a given period When a change in the number of starting memories there are a plurality of times, and it has to be displayed on the start memory display section is omitted the process of changes in the predetermined time period. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the information on the startup memory.

  In addition, when there is an increase or decrease in the start memory within a predetermined period, the effect control means performs a display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory in the first display regardless of the order of change, and then stores the start memory. The display corresponding to the increase is performed.

  Further, the effect control means is configured to be able to perform a decoration display that decorates the change when the start memory display is changed in the first display as the start memory increases or decreases, and within a predetermined period. When the number of start memories changes a plurality of times, the display of the decoration display within the predetermined period is omitted.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can execute a plurality of types of specific effects in one special figure variation display game.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), the specific effect information storage area in the present modification includes areas 1a to 1d associated with the digestion order for each start memory of the first start memory (see FIG. 1), The first storage area for storing information corresponding to the first specific effect in each of the eight areas 2a to 2d associated with the digestion order for each start memory of the two start memories (see Fig. 2) An area 1x-1, x is a to d), and a second storage area (area 1x-2, x is a to d) for storing information corresponding to the second specific effect is provided. Also, two areas are provided so that the executing area corresponds to the first specific effect and the second specific effect.

  That is, information on two types of specific effects can be stored in one start memory. Thereby, when execution of each specific effect is determined, the execution contents of the specific effect to be executed in each of the special figure variation display games that are the targets of the specific effect are set in advance, and the execution of each specific effect is performed. The contents can be managed independently.

  FIG. 136 (b) shows an example in which the countdown notice is set as the first specific effect and the hold change notice is set as the second specific effect in the first start memory. In this example, when the first start memory having the fourth digestion order occurs, execution of the pre-reading notice effect for the start memory is determined as the specific effect. Here, the countdown notice is selected as the first specific effect, and the contents of the countdown notice in each special figure variation display game are determined and specified for the start memory whose digestion order is the first to fourth. Information is stored in the first storage area of the first start-up memory, which is the corresponding area of the effect information storage area.

  Furthermore, the hold change notice is selected as the second specific effect, and the effect contents of the hold change notice in each special figure variation display game are determined for the starting memory whose digestion order is the first to fourth. The information is stored in the second storage area of the first start memory, which is the area corresponding to the specific effect information storage area. In the second storage area, the target of the pending change notice is specified as “hold 4” whose digestion order is fourth. This is the start when the digestion order is fourth when setting the specific performance. This means memory, and it does not mean that the start memory to be notified is changed when the digestion order changes with digestion of the start memory. For example, a unique ID may be attached to each start memory, and the notice target may be specified by the ID. Also, when managing a specific effect by specifying the start memory with an ID unique to each start memory, the specific effect is not managed by the area associated with the digestion order in the specific effect information storage area, You may make it manage a specific production | presentation by the area | region matched with ID.

  For the first start memory having the first and second digestion orders, the countdown notice “no display” is set, and the hold change notice “hold 4 (one stage UP)” is set. Thus, in the special figure variation display game based on these start memories, the countdown advance notice is not displayed, but when the second specific effect is set, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory having the fourth digestion order is displayed. Is held change notice for changing to a mode with a high degree of expectation.

  Further, for the first start memory having the third digestion order, the countdown notice “count 1” is set, and the pending change notice “no change” is set. As a result, in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory, the decoration special figure start memory display is not further changed as a hold change notice, but as a countdown notice, the special figure change display game is immediately before the notice object. An effect of performing the display of “1” indicating that it is is executed.

  Further, for the first start memory having the fourth digestion order, the countdown notice “count 0” is set, and the pending change notice “no change” is set. As a result, in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory, the decoration special figure start memory display is not further changed as a hold change notice, but as a countdown notice, the special figure change display game is immediately before the notice object. An effect of displaying “0” indicating that the above is performed is executed.

  Every time the special figure variation display game that is the target of the specific effect is started, the digestion information of the first start memory digestion order first area information and the second start memory digestion order first area information is digested. The information of the area corresponding to the start memory thus recorded is copied to the executing area. At this time, the information in the first storage area is copied to the execution area-1 and the information in the second storage area is copied to the execution area-2. As a result, the information in the copy source area is deleted, and the information in the digestion order 2 to 4 is carried up one by one.

  Also, when the second start memory is generated during the execution of the specific effect targeted for the first start memory, the process of copying the information of the executing area of the specific effect information storage area to the corresponding area (step C534). In addition, in the process of making it possible to repeatedly execute the specific effect currently being executed in the special figure variation display game based on the second start-up memory, whether to copy information is selected according to the type of notice. In the example of FIG. 136 (b), there is no problem even if the countdown notice is copied and repeatedly executed, but if the pending change notice is repeatedly executed, the stage proceeds more than expected. Therefore, copy is not performed.

  It should be noted that when the second start-up memory is generated, it may be selected with reference to the content of the advance notice whether or not to copy. Further, for example, the first storage area stores a notice that there is no problem in copying, and the second storage area stores a notice that is inconvenient to copy (for example, a pending change notice). In this case, only the information in the first storage area may be copied. Therefore, for example, when only the pending change notice is set as the specific effect, information is not stored in the first storage area, but information is stored only in the second storage area.

  It is also possible to set a plurality of specific effects at the same time, and it is also possible to set another specific effect in a state where the specific effects are already set. Moreover, the notice target may be the same or different.

  When the notice target is different for each specific effect, the final flag is set to the start memory that is digested latest among the start memories for executing the specific effect. In addition, in the case where another specific effect is set in a state where the specific effect has already been set, the specific effect set after the start memory for finally executing the previously set specific effect Is the start memory that is digested later, the last flag previously set is erased and the final flag is set in the subsequent start memory. That is, the final flag is set with respect to the start memory that will end all of the series of specific effects. Furthermore, a final flag corresponding to each specific effect may be set so that the end of each specific effect can be grasped, and a specific effect flag corresponding to each specific effect being executed is also set for the specific effect flag. You may make it do.

  In the above description, two types of specific effects can be set for one start-up memory, but more types of specific effects may be set. In this case, as many storage areas as the number of specific effects that can be set for one start-up memory are provided.

  Based on the above, the variable display game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning area (the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the ordinary start gate 34), and the result of the variable display game is the special result. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value to a player in the event that it becomes a predetermined upper limit of the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning area A start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a number together with a random number value, and a game for determining the result of the variable display game based on the random number value stored as the start storage in the start storage means and executing the variable display game Executing in the execution means (game control device 100) and the variable display game that has not yet been executed is an effect that is determined in advance before the start of the variable display game. An effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect, and the effect control means is capable of executing a plurality of types of specific effects in one variation display game, and executing a plurality of types of specific effects. Is determined in advance for the execution contents of the specific effects to be executed in each of the variable display games that are the targets of the specific effects when it is determined to execute the specific effects for each specific effect. The execution contents are managed independently.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  In addition, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

34 Normal start gate (inflow area, first inflow area, second inflow area)
36 Start winning opening (inflow area, first inflow area, second inflow area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device (inflow area, first inflow area, second inflow area)
50 Collective display device (information display device)
100 Game control device (information display device control means, blinking display timer, start memory means, game execution means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
An information display device for displaying information about the game by means of a light emitter;
An information display device control means for controlling the information display device,
The information display device control means includes:
It is configured to display information about the game by controlling the light emitter in any one of a light-off state and a light-on state, or both of a blinking state,
A blinking display timer for controlling the period of turning off and the period of lighting in the blinking state,
When the blinking state is set, the value of the blinking display timer is controlled to be turned off if it is a predetermined turn-off range, and to be turned on if it is outside the predetermined turn-off range,
Regardless of whether or not the blinking state, the blinking display timer is constantly updated,
When the flashing state is started, the gaming machine starts from a light emitting state corresponding to a value of the flashing display timer at the time of start. An inflow region where inflow of game balls can be detected;
Start memory means capable of storing start memory as a right to execute the game based on detection of a game ball in the inflow region up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Game execution means for executing a game based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means,
The inflow region includes a first inflow region and a second inflow region,
The starting storage means is
Based on the detection of the game ball in the first inflow region, the first start memory is stored as the start memory,
Based on the detection of the game ball in the second inflow region, the second start memory is stored as the start memory,
The game execution means includes
Executing a first game based on the first start-up memory;
A second game is executed based on the second start-up memory;
The information display device control means includes:
Displaying the number of the first start-up memories on the first display unit of the information display device;
Displaying the number of the second start-up memories on the second display unit of the information display device;
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the blinking state is controlled using the blinking display timer common to the first display unit and the second display unit. The information display device control means includes:
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the predetermined turn-off range is a common range for the first display unit and the second display unit.

Images